Newell Hall Renovation Project UF-212 - University of...

Newell Hall Renovation

Project UF-212

PROJECT MANUAL EARLY RELEASE PACKAGE 1

ISSUED: 05/20/15

COMMISSION NO. : 1520203

BOOK 1 OF 1

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00002 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida PROJECT DIRECTORY

#1520203 00002 - 1 SCHENKELSHULTZ / RAMSA ERP #1

SECTION 00002 – PROJECT DIRECTORY Authorized representatives and contact information:

OWNER Representative: Howie Ferguson Address: UF Facilities Planning & Construction, 232 Stadium, P.O. Box 115050 City, State, Zip: Gainesville, FL 32611-5050 Telephone/Fax: (352) 273-4000; (352) 273-4034 Web and E-mail: www.facilities.ufl.edu ; [email protected]

BUILDER Name: AJAX Building Corporation Address: 109 Commerce Rd City, State, Zip: Oldsmar, FL 34677 Telephone/Fax: 813-792-3900/813-792-3939 Web and E-mail: www.ajaxbuilding.com ; [email protected]

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (Architect of Record) Name: Schenkel Shultz Architecture Address: 200 East Robinson St., Suite 300 City, State, Zip: Orlando, Fl 32801 Telephone/Fax: 407-872-3322/407-872-3303 Web and E-mail: www.schenkelshultz.com ; [email protected]

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (Design Architect) Name: Robert A.M. Stern Architects Address: 460 West 34th Street City, State, Zip: New York, New York 10001 Telephone/Fax: 212-967-5100/212-967-5588 Web and E-mail: www.ramsa.com ; [email protected] DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (Landscape Architect) Name: David Conner & Associates Address: 100 East Madison St., Suite 200 City, State, Zip: Tampa, Fl 33602 Telephone/Fax: 813-258-1997/813-254-4194 Web and E-mail: www.dconnerassociate.com ; [email protected] DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (Civil Engineer) Name: CHW Address: 132 NW 76th Drive City, State, Zip: Gainesville, FL 32607 Telephone/Fax: 352-331-1967/352-331-2476 Web and E-mail: www.chw-inc.com ; [email protected]

http://www.facilities.ufl.edu/

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.ajaxbuilding.com/


http://www.schenkelshultz.com/


http://www.ramsa.com/


http://www.dconnerassociate.com/


http://www.chw-inc.com/


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00002 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida PROJECT DIRECTORY


DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (Structural Engineer) Name: Walter P. Moore and Associates Address: 201 East Kennedy, Suite 300 City, State, Zip: Tampa, Fl 33602 Telephone/Fax: 813-221-2424/813-221-2289 Web and E-mail: www.walterpmoore.com ; [email protected]

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (MEP Engineer) Name: Moses and Associates Address: 2209 NW 40th Terrace, Suite A City, State, Zip: Gainesville, Fl 32605 Telephone/Fax: 352-372-1911/352-372-0186 Web and E-mail: www.moses-eng.com ; [email protected] DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (Specifications) Name: Archispec, Inc. Address: 369 Simpson Street City, State, Zip: Lady Lake, Fl 32162 Telephone: 352-430-0987 E-mail: [email protected]

COMMISSIONING CONSULTANT Name: TBD Address: City, State, Zip: Telephone/Fax: Web and E-mail: END OF SECTION 00002

http://www.walterpmoore.com/


http://www.moses-eng.com/



UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00005 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida TABLE OF CONTENTS

#1520203 00005 - 1 SCHENKELSHULTZ/ RAMSA ERP #1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Issued Revised

DIVISION 0 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00001 Title Page 05/20/2015

00002 Project Directory 05/20/2015

00005 Table of Contents 05/20/2015

00006 UF General Terms and Conditions 05/20/2015

00320 Geotechnical Data

00400 Statement of Compliance 05/20/2015

00810 Minority Business Enterprise Participation 05/20/2015

00830 Equal Employment Opportunity Program 05/20/2015

00842 Safety Requirements 05/20/2015

00902 Public Entity Crime 05/20/2015

00903 Asbestos Policy Statement 05/20/2015

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 Summary of the Work 05/20/2015

01014 Builder's Use of the Premises 05/20/2015

01016 Utility Outages and Dig Permits 05/20/2015

01060 Regulatory Requirements 05/20/2015

01100 Alternates

01270 Unit Prices

01310 Construction Schedules 05/20/2015

01340 Submittal Procedures 05/20/2015

01352 LEED Requirements 05/20/2015

01410 Structural Testing and Inspections 05/20/2015

01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 05/20/2015

01505 Construction Waste Management 05/20/2015

01700 Project Closeout 05/20/2015

01732 Selective Demolition 05/20/2015

01800 General Commissioning Requirements

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION

02110 Site Clearing

02150 Site Preparation and Earthwork

02208 Florida Trench Safety Act

02209 Stabilized Subgrade

02211 Rough Grading

02218 Fine Grading

02225 Trenching and Patching of Asphalt Paved Areas

02500 Storm Drainage System

02668 Domestic Water Systems

02730 Sanitary Sewage Systems

02739 Pavement Base



Issued Revised

02740 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement

02751 Cement Concrete Pavement

02842 Bicycle Racks

02221 Building Demolition

02361 Termite Control

02751 Concrete Paving

02764 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants

02780 Unit Paving

02870 Site Furnishings

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

03350 Concrete Finishing

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

04230 Structural Reinforced Concrete Unit Masonry

04813 Brick Masonry Assemblies 05/20/2015

04818 Terra Cotta Masonry 05/20/2015

04851 Dimension Stone Cladding

04935 Historic Masonry Cleaning

04915 Historic Brick Unit Masonry Repair

04917 Historic Terra Cotta Unit Masonry Repair 05/20/2015

04925 Historic Stone Masonry Repair

DIVISION 5 – METALS

05120 Structural Steel Framing

05210 Steel Joist Framing

05310 Steel Roof Decking

05314 Steel Floor Decking

05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing

05500 Metal Fabrications

05511 Metal Stairs

05514 Bar Grating

05521 Pipe and Tube Railings

05721 Ornamental Railings

05811 Architectural Joint Systems

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06100 Rough Carpentry

06160 Sheathing

06202 Interior Finish Carpentry

06412 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets

06417 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops

06615 Simulated Stone Countertops

hsferg

Line



Issued Revised

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07170 Bentonite Waterproofing

07190 Water Repellents

07210 Building Insulation

07214 Foamed-in-Place Masonry Wall Insulation

07260 Vapor Retarders

07275 Weather Barriers

07321 Clay Roof Tiles

07412 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels

07415 Formed Metal Panels

07418 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels

07555 Membrane Roofing

07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

07765 Pavers and Walkways

07811 Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials

07812 Intumescent Fireproofing

07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems

07842 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

07920 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

08110 Steel Doors and Frames

08163 Sliding Aluminum-Framed Glass Doors

08211 Flush Wood Doors

08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doors

08383 Traffic Doors

08411 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

08592 Window Replacement 05/20/2015

08710 Door Hardware

08800 Glazing

08830 Mirrors

08911 Aluminum-Framed Curtain Walls

08950 Translucent Wall Assembly

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09111 Non-Structural Metal Framing

09220 Portland Cement Plaster

09250 Gypsum Board

09265 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies

09310 Tiling

09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

09573 Wood Ceilings

09583 Suspended Decorative Ceiling System

09651 Resilient Flooring

09653 Resilient Base and Accessories

09681 Carpet Tile



Issued Revised

09771 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels

09852 Fabric Wrapped Acoustical Panels

09910 Painting

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10101 Visual Display Surfaces

10155 Toilet Compartments

10265 Wall and Door Protection

10432 Dimensional Letter Signage

10434 Panel Signage

10505 Metal Lockers

10522 Fire Protection Cabinets

10801 Toilet Accessories

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11132 Projection Screens

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12354 Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Faced Casework

12484 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

12494 Roller Shades

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14240 Hydraulic Elevators

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15005 Mechanical General 05/20/2015

15020 Codes and Standards 05/20/2015

15030 Mechanical Related Work 05/20/2015

15105 Pipes and Pipe Fittings 05/20/2015

15110 Valves 05/20/2015

15112 Fuses 600 Volts and Below 05/20/2015

15115 Electric Motors

15120 Piping Specialties 05/20/2015

15125 Mechanical Equipment Shaft Alignment

15130 Expansion Compensation

15135 Vibration Isolation

15140 Meters and Gauges 05/20/2015

15150 Supports, Anchors, and Seals 05/20/2015

15160 Mechanical Identification 05/20/2015

15180 Testing, Cleaning, and Sterilization of Piping Systems

15190 Excavation and Backfill 05/20/2015

15205 Insulation for Plumbing Equipment and Piping

15210 Insulation for HVAC Equipment and Piping

15230 Exterior Insulation for Ductwork

15305 Site Fire Water Systems 05/20/2015

15310 Building Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems 05/20/2015



Issued Revised

15340 Building Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems - Design by Contractor

05/20/2015

15350 Electric Drive Fire Pump 05/20/2015

15405 Potable Water System

15410 Soil, Waste and Vent System

15420 Storm Water System

15430 Plumbing Fixtures, Equipment, Trim & Schedule

15440 Gas System

15475 Plumbing Pumps

15502 Chilled Water Preinsulated Piping and Conduit System

15503 Condensate Drain System

15504 Steam and Condensate Preinsulated Piping and Conduit System

15505 Heating Hot Water and Chilled Water Systems

15507 Steam and Condensate System

15525 Heat Exchangers

15545 Hydronic Specialties

15550 Steam and Condensate Specialties

15560 HVAC Pumps

15575 Condensate Pumps and Receivers

15580 HVAC Manholes

15610 Custom Air Handling Units

15620 Heat Recovery Units

15657 Heat Pipes

15670 Fan Coil Units

15810 Fans

15820 Cooking Hood Packaged System

15825 Specific Use Hoods

15840 HVAC Metal Ductwork

15855 Ductwork Accessories

15860 Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers

15870 Duct Silencers

15875 Wall Louvers

15880 Roof-Mounted Air Intakes and Vents

15885 Air Cleaning Equipment

15890 Air Terminals

15952 Building Automation System

15955 Variable Frequency Drives

15970 Startup Requirements for HVAC Systems

15985 Testing and Balancing of Mechanical Systems

15994 Plumbing System Commissioning

15995 HVAC System Commissioning

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

16005 Electrical General

16020 Codes and Standards

16030 Electrical Related Work



Issued Revised

16034 Reinforced Concrete Foundations for Electrical Equipment

16040 Alterations and Additions to Existing Work

16100 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

16101 Electrical Identification

16103 Grounding and Bonding

16104 Concrete Encased Ductbank

16105 Excavation and Backfill

16107 Service Entrance Methods and Materials-Underground

16112 Fuses 600 Volts and below

16120 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

16140 Enclosed Controllers

16150 Lighting Control Devices

16170 Wiring Devices

16381 Medium Voltage Power Cable and Accessories-Underground

16410 Low Voltage Switchboards, Group Mounted

16420 Panelboards

16445 Service Metering-(Non-Switchboard, UF Only)

16450 Dry-Type Transformers

16454 Transformer - Liquid Cooled - Pad Mounted

16510 Occupancy Sensors

16520 Interior Lighting

16525 Site Lighting

16530 Light Poles and Standards

16570 Low Voltage Lighting Control System

16600 Lightning Protection System-Class I Materials

16731 Fire Detection and Alarm System-Addressable

16787 Access Control System - UF

16900 Work Required for Equipment Furnished By Other Divisions

DIVISION 17 – COMMUNICATIONS

17005 Telecommunications General

17010 Contractor Qualifications

17105 Backbone Cabling System

17110 Horizontal Cabling System

DIVISION 18 – AUDIO / VISUALS SYSTEMS

18005 Audio / Visual General

18010 Contractor Qualifications

18100 Audio / Visual Systems

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

University of Florida

GENERAL TERMS and CONDITIONS

GTC-1 June 19, 2006

GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS ARTICLE 2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ..................................................................................... 8

2.1 Sets of Documents ............................................................................................... 8 2.2 Minimum Requirements ....................................................................................... 8 2.3 Owner Disclaimer of Warranty .............................................................................. 8 2.4 Conflicts in Documents ......................................................................................... 9 2.5 Shop Drawings and Submittals ............................................................................ 9 2.6 Contract Changes ................................................................................................ 9

ARTICLE 3 BUILDER’S REVIEWS AND EVALUATIONS .......................................................... 9

3.1 Sufficiency of Construction Documents and Drawings ......................................... 9 3.2 Sufficiency of Site ............................................................................................... 10

ARTICLE 4 BUILDER’S DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES.......................... 10

4.1 Performance of Work ......................................................................................... 10 4.2 Compliance With Governmental Requirements ................................................. 11 4.3 Safety ................................................................................................................. 11 4.4 On Site Records ................................................................................................. 11 4.5 Bribes and Kick-Backs ....................................................................................... 12 4.6 Quality Control and Testing ................................................................................ 12 4.7 Incident Reporting .............................................................................................. 12 4.8 Hazardous Substances ...................................................................................... 12 4.9 Owner’s Use of and Access To The Site ............................................................ 12 4.10 Commissioning ................................................................................................... 13

ARTICLE 5 BUILDER’S PERSONNEL, SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND SITE FACILITIES ................................................................................................... 13

5.1 Project Staffing ................................................................................................... 13 5.2 Subcontractor/Supplier Contracts ....................................................................... 14 5.3 Resolution of Trade Disputes ............................................................................. 15

ARTICLE 6 GOODS, PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS ............................................................. 15

6.1 Quality of Materials ............................................................................................. 15 6.2 Installation and Use of Materials ........................................................................ 15 6.3 Unsuitable Materials ........................................................................................... 15 6.4 Consistency with Overall Project ........................................................................ 16 6.5 Security For The Project ..................................................................................... 16

ARTICLE 7 DOCUMENTS AND INFORMATION ..................................................................... 16

7.1 Information From Owner .................................................................................... 16 7.2 Resolution of Questions ..................................................................................... 16

GTC-2 June 19, 2006

7.3 Processing of Documents .................................................................................. 16 7.4 Sufficiency of Owner Information ........................................................................ 16

ARTICLE 8 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 17

8.1 Submittal Schedule ............................................................................................ 17 8.2 Processing of Submittals .................................................................................... 17

ARTICLE 9 BUILDER’S INSPECTION AND CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE OR INCOMPLETE WORK ..................................................................................... 17

9.1 Rejection and Correction of Work In Progress ................................................... 17 9.2 Covered or Concealed Work .............................................................................. 18

ARTICLE 10 CHANGE ORDERS AND CHANGES TO THE WORK ....................................... 18

10.1 Change Order Requests .................................................................................... 18 10.2 Owner-Directed Changes ................................................................................... 18 10.3 Professional-Directed Changes .......................................................................... 18 10.4 Administration of Changes ................................................................................. 19 10.5 Compensation for Changes ................................................................................ 19 10.6 Performance of Changes ................................................................................... 19 10.7 Disputes Regarding Changes ............................................................................ 19 10.8 Necessity for Signature Approval ....................................................................... 20

ARTICLE 11 OWNER’S CONSULTANT(S), PROFESSIONAL(S) AND CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION ................................................................. 20

11.1 Owner’s Designated Professional Representative ............................................. 20 11.2 Professional Site Visits ....................................................................................... 20 11.3 Professional Rejection Of Work ......................................................................... 20 11.4 Professional Evaluations .................................................................................... 20 11.5 Professional Submittal Activities ......................................................................... 21 11.6 Professional Interpretations ................................................................................ 21 11.7 Professional Change Order Activities ................................................................. 21 11.8 Professional Pay Application Activities ............................................................... 21 11.9 Professional Relationship To Builder .................................................................. 21

ARTICLE 12 INSPECTION, CORRECTION OF WORK, AND

PROJECT CLOSE OUT ....................................................................................... 22

12.1 Substantial Completion ...................................................................................... 22 12.2 Final Completion ................................................................................................ 23

ARTICLE 13 BUILDER’S WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES ............................................... 25

13.1 One-Year Warranty ............................................................................................ 25 13.2 Express Warranties And Guarantees – Builder................................................... 25 13.3 Express Warranties And Guarantees - Subcontractors And Suppliers ............... 25 13.4 Non-Exclusivity And Survival............................................................................... 26 13.5 Non-Limitation ..................................................................................................... 26

GTC-3 June 19, 2006

13.6 Commencement Of Obligations .......................................................................... 26 ARTICLE 14 OWNER’S DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES.......................... 26

14.1 Timely Compensation Of Builder......................................................................... 26 14.2 Owner Review Of Documents ............................................................................. 26 14.3 Status Of Owner.................................................................................................. 26 14.4 Owner’s Utilities................................................................................................... 26

ARTICLE 15 BUILDER’S COMPENSATION............................................................................ 27

15.1 Unit Prices ........................................................................................................... 27 15.2 Schedule Of Values............................................................................................. 27 15.3 Trench Safety Act ............................................................................................... 27 15.4 Invoicing Procedures........................................................................................... 27 15.5 Payment Procedures........................................................................................... 28 15.6 Owner’s Right To Refuse Payment ..................................................................... 28 15.7 Builder’s Right To Refuse Performance For Non-Payment................................. 29 15.8 Correction Of Past Payments .............................................................................. 29 15.9 Invoice Warranties And Guarantees.................................................................... 29 15.10 Builder’s Signature .............................................................................................. 29 15.11 Taxes................................................................................................................... 29 15.12 Compensation Of Builder’s Subcontractors And Suppliers ................................. 30 15.13 Retainage ............................................................................................................ 30 15.14 Final payment ..................................................................................................... 30

ARTICLE 16 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 30

16.1 Construction Schedule ........................................................................................ 30 16.2 Delay In Performance.......................................................................................... 31 16.3 Modifications To Time For Performance ............................................................. 32 16.4 Early Completion ................................................................................................. 32 16.5 Document Review ............................................................................................... 32

ARTICLE 17 TIME OF PERFORMANCE .................................................................................. 32

17.1 Time Of The Essence.......................................................................................... 32 17.2 Delay Claims ...................................................................................................... 32 17.3 Compensable Delay ............................................................................................ 33 17.4 Excusable Delay.................................................................................................. 33

ARTICLE 18 CONCEALED AND UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS ............................................. 34

18.1 Notification Regarding Unusual Conditions......................................................... 34

ARTICLE 19 PROPRIETARY DOCUMENTS AND CONFIDENTIALITY .................................. 34

19.1 Nature and Use of Information ............................................................................ 34 19.2 Ownership of Information .................................................................................... 34 19.3 Disclosure of Information..................................................................................... 35 19.4 Instructions to Employees .................................................................................. 35

GTC-4 June 19, 2006

19.5 Non-Publication .................................................................................................. 35 ARTICLE 20 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS........................................................................... 35

20.1 Basic Insurance Requirements ........................................................................... 35 20.2 Certificates of Insurance...................................................................................... 37 20.3 Effect of Insurance .............................................................................................. 37 20.4 Waiver of Subrogation......................................................................................... 37

ARTICLE 21 GENERAL BOND REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 37

21.1 General Bond Requirements ............................................................................... 37 21.2 Requests for Copies of Bonds............................................................................. 37 21.3 Delivery of Bonds ............................................................................................... 38

ARTICLE 22 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK.................................................................... 38

22.1 Cease And Desist Order ..................................................................................... 38 ARTICLE 23 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION..... 38

23.1 Termination For Cause By Owner ....................................................................... 38 23.2 Termination For Cause By Builder ...................................................................... 40 23.3 Termination Or Suspension For Convenience .................................................... 40 23.4 Builder’s Compensation When Builder Terminates For Cause

Or Owner Terminates For Convenience.............................................................. 40 23.5 Builder’s Compensation When Owner Terminates For Cause............................ 41 23.6 Limitation On Termination Compensation ........................................................... 41 23.7 Builder’s Responsibility Upon Termination.......................................................... 41 23.8 Lack Of Duty To Terminate ................................................................................. 41 23.9 Limitation On Termination Claim ......................................................................... 41

ARTICLE 24 DISPUTE RESOLUTION...................................................................................... 41

24.1 Mutual Discussion ............................................................................................... 41 24.2 Facilitative Mediation........................................................................................... 41 24.3 Conflicting Dispute Resolution Provisions........................................................... 42 24.4 Arbitration Preclusion .......................................................................................... 42 24.5 Performance During Dispute Resolution ............................................................ 42 24.6 Litigation/Administrative Action ........................................................................... 42

ARTICLE 25 DAMAGES AND REMEDIES ............................................................................... 43

25.1 Builder’s Repair ................................................................................................... 43 25.2 Builder’s Reimbursement .................................................................................... 43 25.3 General Indemnity ............................................................................................... 43 25.4 Intellectual Property Indemnity ............................................................................ 43 25.5 Non-Exclusivity Of Owner’s Remedies................................................................ 44 25.6 Waiver Of Damages ............................................................................................ 44

GTC-5 June 19, 2006

ARTICLE 26 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS........................................................................ 44

26.1 Integration ........................................................................................................... 44 26.2 Severability .......................................................................................................... 44 26.3 Waiver ................................................................................................................. 44 26.4 Strict Compliance ................................................................................................ 44 26.5 Third-Party Beneficiaries ..................................................................................... 44 26.6 Assignment of Anti-Trust Claims ......................................................................... 44 26.7 Drug Free Workplace .......................................................................................... 44 26.8 Survival................................................................................................................45 26.9 Independent Contractor ...................................................................................... 45

GTC-6 June 19, 2006

ARTICLE 1

DEFINITIONS When one of the following capitalized words, terms or phrases is used in the Contract for Construction, it shall be interpreted or construed first as defined below, second according to its generally accepted meaning in the construction industry, and third according to its common and customary usage. Builder: An entity, including but not limited to a general contractor, a trade contractor or a construction manager, engaged directly by the Owner pursuant to a contract for construction. Construction Documents: Plans, specifications, change orders, revisions, addenda, and other information which set forth in detail the Work. Construction Price: The dollar amount for which a Builder agrees to perform the Work set forth in a Contract For Construction. Construction Schedule: The timetable which sets forth pertinent dates for timely completion of the Work. Contract For Construction: A written agreement between the Owner and a Builder for provision of goods, products, materials, equipment, systems, management, supervision, labor and services required to construct all or part of a Project, as more particularly defined in the Agreement for Construction Management Services, Agreement for Design-Build Services or Owner-Contractor Agreement, as applicable. Contract For Professional Services: A written agreement between the Owner and a Professional for provision of services and related items required to design or engineer all or part of a Project. Certificate Of Substantial Completion: Document declaring the Work substantially complete and suitable for occupancy or beneficial use by the Owner. Final Completion: The stage of construction when the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract For Construction and the Owner has received all documents and items necessary for closeout of the Work. Hazardous Substances: The term "Hazardous Substances" means all hazardous or toxic substances, materials, wastes, pollutants and contaminants which are listed, defined, or regulated under applicable laws, rules, regulations, codes, ordinances, orders and directives pertaining or regulated to health, safety or the environment, including, but not limited to, the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act as amended, (42 U.S.C. § 9601 et seq), the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act as amended, (42 U.S.C. § 6901 et seq), the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C.A. §§ 1251 to 1387), the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C.A. §§ 7401 to 7671q), the Emergency Planning and Community Right to Know Act (42 U.S.C.A. §§ 11001 to 11050), the Toxic Substances Control Act (15 U.S.C.A. §§ 2601 to 2692), the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 U.S.C.A. §§ 6901 to 6992k), the Oil Pollution Act (33 U.S.C.A. §§ 2701 to 2761) and all rules and regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, “Hazardous Substances” shall specifically include polychlorinated biphenyl, asbestos (friable and non-friable), radon, urea formaldehyde, gasoline,

GTC-7 June 19, 2006

diesel, oil, hydrocarbons, petroleum derived constituents, biomedical waste, or hazardous or toxic residue.

Owner’s Related Parties: The Board of Governors and its officers, trustees and employees and the officers, trustees and employees of Owner. Professional: An entity, including but not limited to a licensed architect or engineer, engaged directly by the Owner to provide design or engineering services. Project Design Schedule: The timetable which sets forth the required relationships between, and pertinent dates for, required completion of design and engineering services, documents and related activities. Site: The geographical location of a Project, usually defined by legal boundary lines, and the location characteristics including, but not limited to, grades and lines of streets, alleys, pavements and adjoining structures, rights-of-way, restrictions, easements, encroachments, zoning, deed restrictions, existing buildings and improvements, and service and utility lines. Substantial Completion: The stage of construction when the Owner can occupy or beneficially use satisfactorily completed Work for its intended purpose and a certificate of occupancy has been issued. Work: Any and all computers, construction machinery, documents, equipment, facilities, fixtures, furnishings, goods, heat, items, labor, licenses, management, materials, permits, products, services, supervision, supplies, systems, taxes, testing, tools, utilities, transportation, vehicles, and water, required to be performed or supplied and/or necessary for proper execution and completion of the Project, or some portion thereof, whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated into the Project; provided, however, that Work does not include performance of pre-construction services by a construction manager.

ARTICLE 2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2.1 Sets of Documents. The Owner shall provide the Builder with one printed set of

documents, with additional copies available for purchase at a local reproduction firm designated by the Professional. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract For Construction, the Builder may request that the Construction Documents required by the Builder for the Work also be furnished to it on electronic media. To the extent that such documents are available on electronic media, the Builder will be furnished one set of the requested information on electronic media. Any additional electronic copies of Construction Documents required by the Builder for execution of the Work shall be made by the Builder at the Builder’s cost and expense.

2.2 Minimum Requirements. In every case, requirements established by the Construction

Documents shall be considered as the minimum which will be accepted. 2.3 Owner Disclaimer Of Warranty. The Owner has requested that its Professional(s)

prepare documents for the Project, including the plans and specifications for the Project, which are to be complete, accurate, coordinated, and adequate for bidding, negotiating and constructing the Work. However, the Owner makes no representation or warranty of

GTC-8 June 19, 2006

any nature whatsoever to the Builder concerning such documents. The Builder hereby acknowledges and represents that it has not relied, and does not and will not rely, upon any representations or warranties by the Owner concerning such documents, as no such representations or warranties have been or are hereby made.

2.4 Conflicts In Documents. In the event of any conflict, discrepancy, or inconsistency

among any of the documents which make up the Contract For Construction, the following shall control:

2.4.1 As between figures given on plans and scaled measurements, the figures shall

govern; 2.4.2 As between large-scale plans and small-scale plans, the large-scale plans shall

govern; and 2.4.3 As between plans and specifications, the requirements of the specifications shall

govern.

2.5 Shop Drawings And Submittals. Shop drawings and other submittals from the Builder or its subcontractors and suppliers do not constitute a part of the Contract for Construction.

2.6 Contract Changes. The Builder understands and agrees that the Contract for

Construction cannot be changed except as provided herein. No act, omission or course of dealing by the parties shall alter the requirement that modifications of the Contract for Construction can be accomplished only by written documents signed by the parties.

ARTICLE 3 BUILDER’S REVIEWS AND EVALUATIONS

3.1 Sufficiency Of Construction Documents And Drawings. The Builder acknowledges

its continuing duty to review and evaluate the Construction Documents during the performance of its services and shall immediately notify the Owner and the Professional(s) about any (i) problems, conflicts, defects, deficiencies, inconsistencies or omissions it discovers in or between the Construction Documents; and (ii) variances it discovers between the Construction Documents and applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules and regulations.

3.1.1 If the Builder performs any Work which it knows or should have known involves

(i) a recognized problem, conflict, defect, deficiency, inconsistency or omission in the Construction Documents; or (ii) a variance between the Construction Documents and requirements of applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules and regulations, without notifying the Professional(s) and prior to receiving written authorization from the Professional(s) to proceed, the Builder shall be responsible for the consequences of such performance.

3.1.2 Drawings are generally drawn to scale; however, the figured dimensions or notes

thereon shall govern. Before ordering any materials or doing any Work, the Builder and subcontractors shall verify all measurements at the Site and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. Discrepancies shall be reported in

GTC-9 June 19, 2006

writing to the Professional prior to proceeding with the Work. No extra charge or compensation will be entertained due to differences between actual measurements and dimensions indicated on drawings, if such differences do not result in a change in the scope of Work or if the Professional failed to receive written notice before the Work was performed.

3.2 Sufficiency Of Site. Prior to signing the Contract for Construction, the Builder has:

(i) visited the Site and become familiar with local conditions under which the Project is to be constructed and operated; and

(ii) reviewed and familiarized itself with the Site survey and any existing structures

on the Site, and gathered all other information necessary for a full understanding of the Work.

In addition, if the Work involves modifications to or remodeling of an existing structure(s) or other man-made feature(s) on the Site, the Builder has also:

(iii) reviewed all as-built and record drawings, plans and specifications of which

Owner has informed Builder; and (iv) thoroughly inspected the structure(s) and man-made feature(s) to be modified or

remodeled prior to submission of bid, if any, but in all events prior to signing the Contract for Construction.

Claims resulting from the Builder’s failure to familiarize itself with the Site or pertinent documents shall be deemed waived.

ARTICLE 4 BUILDER'S DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS

AND RESPONSIBILITIES 4.1 Performance Of Work. The Builder shall perform and complete its obligations under

the Contract for Construction using its best skill and attention, and covenants with the Owner to furnish management, supervision, coordination, labor and services (i) which expeditiously, economically and properly completes the Work in the manner most consistent with the Owner's interests and objectives; (ii) which comply with the Contract for Construction; and (iii) which are in accordance with the highest standards currently practiced by persons and entities performing or providing management, supervision, coordination, labor and services on projects similar in size, complexity and cost to the Project.

4.1.1 The Builder shall not be required to provide professional services which

constitute the practice of architecture or engineering, unless provided in the Construction Documents and relating to those divisions of the Work for which it is appropriate for Builder’s subcontractors to engage or employ licensed engineers for design associated with the Work, such as trusses.

GTC-10 June 19, 2006

4.1.2. All services rendered by the Builder for the Project shall be performed by or under the immediate supervision of persons possessing expertise in the discipline of the service being rendered.

4.1.3 The Builder shall, in the course of providing the Work, cooperate and

communicate with the Owner and all other persons or entities as required for satisfactory completion of the Project.

4.1.4 The Builder understands and acknowledges that the Work referred to in the

Contract for Construction may be only part of the Project and that the Project may include the construction of other structures or other construction activities on the same Site. The Builder shall conduct all its activities so as not to interfere with the construction of, or operations within or from, other structures on the Site.

4.1.5 The Builder shall not damage, endanger, compromise or destroy any part of the

Project or the Site, including by way of example and not limitation, work being performed by others on the Site, monuments, stakes, benchmarks and other survey points, utility services, and existing features or structures on the Site. Should the Builder damage, compromise or destroy any part of the Project or the Site, the Builder shall be fully and exclusively responsible for and bear all costs associated therewith.

4.2 Compliance With Governmental Requirements. The Builder shall:

(i) comply with all applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of all governmental, public and quasi-public authorities and agencies having jurisdiction over the Project;

(ii) prepare and file documents required to obtain, and shall obtain, all necessary

approvals and permits, including building permit(s), of all governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, provided Owner shall pay all building permit and state fire marshal inspection fees directly; and

(iii) give all notices required of it by governmental authorities relating to the Project.

4.3 Safety. Safety shall be a prime concern of the Builder at all times. The Builder shall be solely responsible for and have control over the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures for coordinating and constructing the Work, including Site safety and safety precautions and programs.

4.4 On Site Records. The Builder shall maintain at the Site one copy of all drawings,

specifications, addenda, approved shop drawings, daily logs, change orders, submittals, other modifications and all other documents generated throughout the course of the project in good order and accurately marked depicting all changes as they occur during construction. The as-built drawings shall be available at all times to the Owner, the Professional(s), the Owner’s consultants, and quality control and testing agency personnel. The drawings shall be neatly and clearly marked in color during construction to record all variations made during construction, and the Builder shall include such supplementary notes and details necessary to clearly and accurately represent as-built construction. The daily logs shall contain detailed information regarding weather

GTC-11 June 19, 2006

conditions, materials delivered, work performed, operating hours, subcontractors working on the Project and staffing of each subcontractor.

4.5 Bribes And Kick-Backs. The Builder shall not by any means:

(i) induce any person or entity employed in the construction of the Project to give up any part of the compensation to which that person or entity is entitled;

(ii) offer nor accept any bribes or kick-backs in connection with the Project from or to

any individual or entity, including any of its trade contractors, subcontractors, consultants, suppliers or manufacturers of Project goods and materials; or

(iii) without the express written permission of the Owner in accordance with Owner’s

Policy PMG-B-15, call for or by exclusion require or recommend the use of any subcontractor, consultant, product, material, equipment, system, process or procedure in which the Builder has a direct or indirect proprietary or other pecuniary interest.

4.6 Quality Control And Testing. The Builder shall develop and implement a quality

management program to ensure quality construction. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract for Construction, the Builder shall select the quality control and testing agencies, subject to Owner’s written approval. The Builder shall coordinate all tests and inspections required by the Construction Documents, and the Builder shall arrange for tests and inspections to be conducted as necessary to avoid any interference with the progress of Work. No claims for extension of time or extra costs will be allowed on account of any testing, retesting, inspection, re-inspection, or rejection of Work when defective or deficient Work is found. Cost of specified measures and tests required by the Construction Documents and performed by Owner-approved quality control and testing agencies shall be included in the Cost of the Work.

4.7 Incident Reporting. The Builder shall immediately notify the Owner and

Professional(s), both orally and in writing, of the nature and details of all incidents which may adversely affect the quality or progress of the Work including, but not limited to, union jurisdictional disputes, accidents, delays, damages to Work and other significant occurrences.

4.8 Hazardous Substances. The Builder shall immediately notify the Owner and the

Professional(s), both orally and in writing, of the presence and location of any physical evidence of, or information regarding, environmental contamination on the Site (including but not limited to Hazardous Substances and petroleum releases) of which it becomes aware. If the Builder encounters environmental contamination (including but not limited to Hazardous Substances), the Builder shall (i) immediately stop performance of Work or that portion of the Work affected by or affecting such contamination; (ii) secure the contaminated area against intrusion; (iii) not disturb or remove the contamination; (iv) not proceed, or allow any subcontractor or supplier to proceed, with any Work or other activities in the area affected by such contamination until directed to do so by the Owner; and (v) take any other steps necessary to protect life and health.

4.9 Owner’s Use Of And Access To The Site. The Builder shall perform the Work so as

not to interrupt any operations of the Owner on the Site.

GTC-12 June 19, 2006

4.9.1 The Builder understands and acknowledges that the Owner may need access to or use of certain areas of the Site or Work prior to the Builder’s achievement of Substantial Completion, and that such occupancy, access or use shall not constitute the Owner's acceptance of any Work.

4.9.2 The Builder shall not enter any Owner-occupied area of the Site or Project unless

first approved and scheduled by the Owner. The Builder understands and acknowledges that the Owner may incur damages if the Owner’s operations on the Site are interrupted or impaired as a result of the Work.

4.9.3 The Builder shall afford the Owner's own forces, and other consultants, trade

contractors, subcontractors and suppliers, access to the Site for performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate its construction and operations with theirs as required by the Construction Documents.

4.10 Commissioning. If the Work is to be commissioned through the use of a

commissioning consultant, the Builder shall, through the Owner or the Owner’s commissioning consultant, as the case may be, schedule and coordinate all equipment and systems start-ups and Project commissioning within its scope of the Work.

4.10.1 The Builder shall perform functional performance testing of items being

commissioned under the supervision of the Owner’s commissioning consultant, as directed by the Professional.

4.10.2 Owner training and all commissioning activities, including functional performance

tests, shall be satisfactorily completed prior to Substantial Completion.

ARTICLE 5

BUILDER'S PERSONNEL, SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND SITE FACILITIES

5.1 Project Staffing. The Builder shall staff the Project with qualified and designated

individuals and entities responsible for its obligations and performance.

5.1.1 The Builder shall name a representative (the “Builder’s Representative”) to serve as its primary communication contact with the Owner and the Professional(s).

5.1.2 The Builder’s Representative, or another authorized representative of the Builder,

shall be present at all times when Work is being performed.

5.1.3 The Builder shall employ persons skilled in the tasks assigned to them and shall contract with subcontractors and suppliers skilled in the tasks assigned to them and capable of working harmoniously with all trades, crafts and other individuals on the Project. The Builder shall use its best efforts to minimize the likelihood of any strike, work stoppage or other labor disturbance.

5.1.4 The Builder shall immediately remove from the Site, for the duration of the

Project, any person making an inappropriate religious, racial, sexual or ethnic comment, statement or gesture toward any other individual.

GTC-13 June 19, 2006

5.1.5 The Builder shall immediately remove from the Site, for the duration of the Project, any person who is incompetent, careless, or not working in harmony.

5.1.6 The Builder shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of its

agents and employees, consultants, subcontractors and suppliers. 5.2 Subcontractor/Supplier Contracts.

The Builder shall enter into written contracts with its subcontractors and suppliers, and those written contracts shall be consistent with the Contract for Construction. It is the intent of the Owner and the Builder that the obligations of the Builder’s subcontractors and suppliers inure to the benefit of the Owner and the Builder, and that the Owner be a third-party beneficiary of the Builder’s agreements with its subcontractors and suppliers. 5.2.1 The Builder shall make available to each subcontractor and supplier, prior to the

execution of written contracts with any of them, a copy of the pertinent portions of the Contract for Construction, including those portions of the Construction Documents to which the subcontractor or supplier will be bound, and shall require that each subcontractor and supplier shall similarly make copies of applicable parts of such documents available to its respective subcontractors and suppliers.

5.2.2 The Builder shall include in its written contracts with its subcontractors and

suppliers a provision which contains the acknowledgment and agreement of the subcontractor or supplier that it has received and reviewed the applicable terms, conditions and requirements of the Contract for Construction that are included by reference in its written contract with the Builder, and that it will abide by those terms, conditions and requirements.

5.2.3 The Builder’s written contracts with its subcontractors and suppliers shall

preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and include the acknowledgment and agreement of each subcontractor or supplier that the Owner is a third-party beneficiary of the contract. The Builder’s agreements with its subcontractors and suppliers shall require that in the event of default under, or termination of, the Contract for Construction, and upon request of the Owner, the Builder’s subcontractors and suppliers will perform services for the Owner.

5.2.4 Without limitation of the foregoing subsections, the Builder’s written contracts with

its subcontractors and suppliers shall include the following provision: “When the Builder receives payment from the Owner for labor, services or materials furnished by subcontractors and suppliers hired by the Builder for the Project, the Builder shall remit payment due to those subcontractors and suppliers, less the value of any item contested in accordance with the Contract for Construction, within ten (10) days after the Builder’s receipt of payment from the Owner. When the payment due the subcontractor is for final payment, including retainage, the subcontractor must include with the invoice for final payment, a conditional release of lien and all required warranties and closeout documentation. When the subcontractor receives payment from the Builder for labor, services, or materials furnished by the subcontractors and suppliers hired by the subcontractor, the subcontractor shall remit payment due to those subcontractors and suppliers, less the value of any item contested in accordance with the

GTC-14 June 19, 2006

Contract for Construction, within ten (10) days after the subcontractor’s receipt of payment”.

5.3 Resolution Of Trade Disputes. The Builder shall promptly resolve claims, complaints,

labor disputes and disputes over assignment of work tasks by and among its subcontractors and suppliers.

ARTICLE 6 GOODS, PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

6.1 Quality Of Materials. The Builder shall furnish goods, products, materials, equipment

and systems which:

(i) comply with the Contract for Construction; (ii) conform to applicable specifications, descriptions, instructions, drawings, data

and samples;

(iii) are new (unless otherwise specified or permitted) and without apparent damage; (iv) are of quality, strength, durability, capacity or appearance equal to or higher than

that required by the Construction Documents; (v) are merchantable;

(vi) are free from defects; and

(vii) are beyond and in addition to those required by manufacturers' or suppliers'

specifications where such additional items are required by the Construction Documents.

6.2 Installation And Use Of Materials. All goods, products, materials, equipment and

systems named or described in the Construction Documents, and all others furnished as equal thereto shall, unless specifically stated otherwise, be furnished, used, installed, employed and protected in strict compliance with the specifications, recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier, unless such specifications, recommendations or instructions deviate from accepted construction practices, or the Construction Documents, in which case the Builder shall so inform the Owner and Professional and shall proceed as directed by that Professional, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. Accordingly, there shall be no substitutions of materials and equipment except as otherwise expressly permitted herein The Builder shall coordinate and interrelate all trade contracts, and subcontracts to ensure compatibility of goods, products, materials, equipment and systems, and validity of all warranties and guarantees, required by the Construction Documents for the Work.

6.3 Unsuitable Materials. The Builder shall inform the Owner of goods, products, materials

and equipment or systems which the Builder knows are unsuitable or unavailable at the time of bid submission, and claims relating to or arising out of claims that goods, products, materials, equipment or systems are unsuitable or unavailable shall not be entertained by the Owner unless the Builder, subcontractor, or supplier notified the

GTC-15 June 19, 2006

Owner in writing at the time of bid submission, along with proposed alternatives. Approval by the Owner and a Professional does not mean or imply final acceptance by the Owner and Professional if such items should be defective or not as previously represented. Should the Builder furnish any approved goods, products, materials, equipment or systems different from or in addition to those required by the Construction Documents which require supplemental materials or installation procedures different from or in addition to those require for specified items, the Builder shall provide such at no increased cost to the Owner.

6.4 Consistency with Overall Project. If Builder is acting as construction manager or

design/builder, Builder shall also inform the Owner and Professional during the various stages of development of the design if proposed materials or equipment do not conform with the Project design concept and the Owner’s construction budget.

6.5 Security For The Project. The Builder shall provide security for the Project, including

but not limited to security for its Work in progress and for the goods, products, materials, equipment, systems, construction machinery, tools, devices and other items required, used or to be used for its scope of the Work.

ARTICLE 7 DOCUMENTS AND INFORMATION

7.1 Information From Owner. The Owner shall provide the Builder with information

reasonably necessary to assist the Builder in performing its services including, if applicable and available:

(i) the Site legal description and any required survey; (ii) all written and tangible material of which it informs Builder concerning conditions

below ground at the Site; (iii) if the Project involves an existing structure, all as-built drawings, record drawings,

plans, specifications and structure system information with respect to such structure of which Owner makes Builder aware; and

(iv) the Owner’s pertinent Project dates and key milestone dates.

7.2 Resolution Of Questions. The Builder shall resolve all questions concerning the

Construction Documents with the Professional who has prepared the documents. 7.3 Processing Of Documents. When requested to do so by the Owner, the Builder shall

process documents, and provide other reasonably required drawings, services and certifications, necessary to enable the Owner to (i) obtain permits or other approvals not otherwise required to be obtained by Builder; and (ii) represent that the Work complies with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the Project.

7.4 Sufficiency Of Owner Information. The furnishing of information by the Owner to the

Builder shall not relieve the Builder of responsibilities contained elsewhere in the Contract for Construction to evaluate information and documents provided by the Owner

GTC-16 June 19, 2006

and the Builder shall timely notify the Owner in writing of any additional information needed or services required from the Owner in order for the Builder to perform the Work.

ARTICLE 8 SUBMITTALS

8.1 Submittal Schedule. The Builder shall timely prepare and transmit to the Professional

a schedule for provision of all anticipated submittals. The schedule shall (i) include submittals required by the specifications; (ii) be in a format acceptable to the Professional; (iii) be coordinated with the construction schedule; and (iv) set forth specific dates for submission of the listed submittals.

8.2 Processing Of Submittals. The Builder shall in timely fashion review, approve or reject

as necessary, and forward approved submittals to the Professional for review and approval along with such detail and information as the Professional requires. No part of the Work dealt with by a submittal shall be fabricated or performed until such approval has been given.

8.2.1 A Professional is responsible to the Owner, but not to the Builder, to verify that

the submittals conform to the design concept and functional requirements of the plans and specifications, that the detailed design portrayed in shop drawings and proposed equipment and materials shown in submittals are of the quality specified and will function properly, and that the submittals comply with the Contract for Construction.

8.2.2 All Work shall be performed in accordance with approved submittals. Approval of

submittals by a Professional shall not relieve the Builder from complying with the Contract for Construction, including all plans and specifications, addenda thereto and approved Change Orders.

8.2.3 Re-submittals required to correct errors, omissions, or invalid substitutions by the

Builder or its subcontractors shall not constitute an excusable or compensable delay.

ARTICLE 9 BUILDER’S INSPECTION AND CORRECTION

OF DEFECTIVE OR INCOMPLETE WORK 9.1 Rejection And Correction Of Work In Progress. During the course of Project, the

Builder shall inspect and promptly reject any Work (i) which does not conform to the Construction Documents; or (ii) which does not comply with any applicable law, statute, building code, rule or regulation of any governmental, public and quasi-public authorities and agencies having jurisdiction over the Project.

9.1.1 The Builder shall promptly correct or require the correction of all rejected Work,

whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Builder shall bear all costs of correcting such Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for all services and expenses necessitated by such correction.

GTC-17 June 19, 2006

9.1.2 The Builder shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or other trade contractors or subcontractors caused by the Builder 's correction or removal of rejected Work.

9.2 Covered Or Concealed Work. If a portion of the Work has been covered, the Builder

shall, if notified to do so by the Owner or a Professional, uncover the designated portion for observation and then replace it.

9.2.1 If the designated portion of the Work was covered contrary to the request of the

Owner or the Professional, or to requirements specifically expressed in the Construction Documents, the Builder shall receive no additional compensation for the costs of uncovering and replacement or modification of the Construction Schedule.

9.2.2 If the designated portion of the Work was covered prior to a specific request by

the Owner or the Professional that it remain uncovered, the Builder shall receive additional compensation for the costs of uncovering and replacement or modification of the Construction Schedule(s) only if the designated portion of the Work was in conformance with the Construction Documents.

ARTICLE 10 CHANGE ORDERS AND CHANGES TO THE WORK

10.1 Change Order Requests. Any party to the construction process may request changes

to the Work, compensation or applicable schedules.

10.1.1 With respect to such requests for changes by the Builder, the Builder shall prepare and submit change order requests to the Professional, together with appropriate back-up documentation.

10.1.2 With respect to requests for changes by parties other than the Builder, the

Builder shall promptly review and respond to change order requests submitted by a Professional.

10.1.3 When requested to do so, the Builder shall prepare and submit to a Professional

drawings, specifications or other data in support of a change order request. 10.1.4 Each change order request submitted by Builder shall include any and all time

and monetary impacts of the change, whether the change order is considered alone or with all other changes during the course of the Project, together with substantiating back-up documentation.

10.2 Owner-Directed Changes. The Owner may unilaterally direct the Builder to implement

changes in the Work so long as the Work the Owner is requiring is not outside of the general scope of the Contract for Construction, and the Builder, upon written direction from the Owner, shall proceed with such change.

10.3 Professional-Directed Changes. A Professional, without the Owner's prior approval,

may authorize or direct the Builder to make minor changes in the Work which are

GTC-18 June 19, 2006

consistent with the intent of the Construction Documents and which do not involve a change in Project cost, time for construction, scope, or approved design elements, and the Builder shall promptly carry out such changes. Any such minor changes shall be implemented by written field order and executed by the Builder.

10.4 Administration Of Changes. The Professional will administer and manage all change

order requests and change orders and will prepare required drawings, specifications and other supporting data as necessary in a timely fashion, in recognition of the Project schedule, in connection with minor changes, change order requests, including claims for additional compensation, time or both, and change orders.

10.5 Compensation For Changes. With respect to all change order requests involving

credit to the Owner or additional compensation to the Builder, the Builder shall (i) obtain from subcontractors and suppliers the best possible price quotations; (ii) review such quotations to ascertain whether they are reasonable; (iii) prepare an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data, including reasonable expenditures by, and savings to, those performing the Work involved in the proposed change; and (iv) provide a reasonable price quotation to the Professional.

10.5.1 If price quotations for change order requests are determined by the Professional

to be unreasonable, the Builder shall, in writing, justify said quotations or provide additional back-up materials. If after review of the additional information the Professional determines the quotation is unreasonable, the Owner may require the subject Work be performed on a time and material basis.

10.5.2 The Builder and its subcontractors and suppliers shall be allowed no additional

compensation for any costs, fees or expenses incurred in performing services already required by the Contract for Construction, and shall not be entitled to additional reimbursement for home-office, other non-job-site or indirect overhead expenses, or tools necessary for construction.

10.5.3 It is the responsibility of the Builder to review and approve all pricing of additional

work required of its subcontractors and suppliers.

10.6 Performance Of Changes. Upon receipt of an executed change order or approved change order request, changes in the Work shall be promptly performed. All changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable conditions of the Construction Documents.

10.7 Disputes Regarding Changes. 10.7.1 Regardless if there is a dispute (i) that a change has occurred; (ii) whether a

change in the Work will result in adjustment of compensation or applicable schedules; or (iii) as to the amount of any adjustment of compensation or applicable schedules, the change shall be carried out if the Owner so directs. No claim shall be prejudiced by performance of the Work so long as the Owner is notified of the claim in writing prior to performance of the Work which is the subject of the dispute and the party disputing the decision of the Owner recites the reasons for its dispute in the written notice. Failure to notify the Owner in writing shall constitute a waiver of any claim resulting from the change.

GTC-19 June 19, 2006

10.7.2 In the event a change order request is approved by the Owner in the absence of an agreement as to cost, time, or both, the Professional will (i) receive and maintain all documentation pertaining thereto; (ii) examine such documentation on the Owner's behalf; (iii) take such other action as may be reasonably necessary or as the Owner may request; and (iv) make a written recommendation to the Owner concerning any appropriate adjustment in the Construction Price or time.

10.8 Necessity For Signature Approval. No act, omission or course of dealing shall alter

the requirement that change orders shall be in writing and signed by the Owner, and that change orders are the exclusive method for effecting any adjustment to compensation or applicable schedules. The Builder understands and agrees, on behalf of itself and its subcontractors and suppliers, that neither compensation nor applicable schedules can be changed by implication, oral agreement, or unwritten change order.

ARTICLE 11 OWNER’S CONSULTANT(S), PROFESSIONAL(S) AND

CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION 11.1 Owner’s Designated Professional Representative. Unless otherwise directed by the

Owner, the Professional shall act as the Owner’s representative. 11.1.1 The Professional will be the Owner's design representative during performance

of the Work and will consult with and advise the Owner on all design and technical matters.

11.1.2 The Professional will act as initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract

for Construction and as the Owner’s advisor on claims. 11.2 Professional Site Visits. The Professional will visit the Site with sufficient frequency

for familiarization with the progress and quality of the Work and to inspect the Work to determine compliance of the Work with (i) the Contract for Construction, including approved shop drawings and other submittals; (ii) the Construction Schedule; and (iii) applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules or regulations of all governmental, public and quasi-public authorities and agencies having or asserting jurisdiction over the Project.

11.3 Professional Rejection Of Work. The Professional may disapprove or reject Work

which does not comply with (i) the Contract for Construction including approved shop drawings and other submittals; or (ii) applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules or regulations of any governmental, public and quasi-public authorities and agencies having or asserting jurisdiction over the Project.

11.4 Professional Evaluations. 11.4.1 The Professional will review and evaluate the results of all inspections, tests and

written reports required by the Contract for Construction and by any governmental entity having or asserting jurisdiction over the Project. The Professional will take appropriate action on test results, including acceptance, rejection, requiring additional testing or corrective work, or such other action

GTC-20 June 19, 2006

deemed appropriate by the Professional. The Professional will promptly reject Work which does not conform to and comply with testing requirements.

11.4.2 The Professional may require inspection or testing of any Work in addition to that

required by the Contract for Construction or governmental entities having or asserting jurisdiction over the Project when such additional inspections and testing is necessary or advisable, whether or not such Work is then fabricated, installed or completed. The Professional will take appropriate action on all such special testing and inspection reports, including acceptance, rejection, requiring additional testing or corrective work, or such other action deemed appropriate by the Professional.

11.5 Professional Submittal Activities. The Professional will review and approve, reject or

take other appropriate action on submittals such as shop drawings, product data, samples and proposed equal materials or equipment and requested substitutions not more than fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt, and will not approve any submittals unless such submittals conform with the Construction Documents. A Professional’s review of submittals shall not constitute final acceptance of materials or equipment furnished or installed if such materials or equipment should be defective or not as represented by approved submittals or as otherwise required by the Construction Documents. The Builder remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performance of the Work.

11.6 Professional Interpretations. A Professional will, when requested to do so in writing

by the Builder, promptly and so as to cause no unnecessary delay, render written or graphic interpretations and decisions necessary for the proper execution of the Work. A Professional’s interpretations and decisions relating to artistic effect shall be final if not inconsistent with the Contract for Construction.

11.7 Professional Change Order Activities. The Professional will consult with and advise

the Owner concerning, and will administer and manage, all change order requests and change orders on behalf of the Owner.

11.8 Professional Pay Application Activities. The Professional will review applications for

payment, including such accompanying data, information and schedules as the Professional requires, to determine the amounts due to the Builder and shall authorize payment by the Owner to the Builder in writing. After the Work is determined to be finally complete by the Professional, the Professional will certify to the Owner in writing that the Builder is entitled to final payment and submit the pay application to the Owner for final approval.

11.9 Professional Relationship To Builder. The duties, obligations and responsibilities of

the Builder under the Contract for Construction shall not be changed, abridged, altered, discharged, released, or satisfied by any duty, obligation or responsibility of any Professional. The Builder shall not be a third-party beneficiary of any agreement by and between the Owner and any Professional. The duties of the Builder to the Owner shall be independent of, and shall not be diminished by, any duties or obligations of any Professional to the Owner.

GTC-21 June 19, 2006

ARTICLE 12 INSPECTION, CORRECTION OF WORK,

AND PROJECT CLOSE OUT 12.1 Substantial Completion. Substantial Completion of the Work shall be deemed to have

occurred on the later of: (i) the dates that the Work passes a Substantial Completion inspection, (ii) the date the required Substantial Completion documentation and items have been produced, or (iii) the date a certificate of occupancy is issued for the Work.

12.1.1 When the Builder believes that the Work is substantially complete, it shall notify

the Owner and the Professional that its Work is ready for a Substantial Completion inspection. The Builder shall endeavor to give the Owner and Professional notice two (2) weeks prior to the predicted Substantial Completion inspection date.

12.1.2 Upon receipt of notification from the Builder, the Professional will coordinate with

the Owner and the Builder a date for inspection of the Work to determine whether the Work is substantially complete.

12.1.3 At inspection(s) to determine whether the Work is substantially complete, the

Professional will:

(i) inspect the Work;

(ii) list additional items to be completed or corrected; and

(iii) determine, in consultation with the Owner, whether Substantial Completion of the Work has occurred.

12.1.4 If the Work is determined not to be substantially complete, the Work shall be

prosecuted until the Work is substantially complete and the inspection process shall be repeated at no additional cost to the Owner until the Work is determined to be substantially complete. Builder will be responsible for costs of the Professional associated with premature inspections.

12.1.5 On or prior to the required date of Substantial Completion, the Builder shall

deliver keys, permits, and other necessary and customary documents and items pre-requisite for the Owner’s occupancy and use of the Work for its intended purpose. These documents and items are enumerated in the Owner’s Quality Assurance and Substantial Completion Guide. The Professional will obtain and review Substantial Completion documentation and items, and will inform the Builder of any deficiencies.

12.1.6 When the Owner, the Builder and the Professional agree that the Work has

passed the Substantial Completion inspection and the Builder has produced the required Substantial Completion documentation and items, they shall each sign the Owner’s standard form Certificate of Substantial Completion declaring the Work substantially complete and establishing the actual date of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall also include a list of and timeline for the completion of Work needing completion and correction.

GTC-22 June 19, 2006

12.1.7 If the Work is commissioned through the services of a commissioning consultant, such commissioning shall be completed as a pre-requisite to the Work being declared Substantially Complete, provided Builder shall not be responsible for delays in commissioning not the fault of Builder.

12.1.8 The Builder shall provide the Owner with operation and maintenance manuals

and other operational documentation not less than twenty-eight calendar days prior to the required date of Substantial Completion to allow adequate time for training prior to commissioning and the Owner’s occupancy of the Project.

12.1.9 The Builder shall meet with the Owner’s personnel not less than twenty-eight (28)

calendar days prior to the required date of Substantial Completion to familiarize and train them with respect to maintenance and use of the Project. All training sessions shall be videotaped, with copies provided to the Owner.

12.1.10 The date of Substantial Completion shall fix the commencement date of

warranties and guaranties and allocate between the Owner and the Builder responsibility for security, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance.

12.2 Final Completion. Final Completion of the Work shall be deemed to have occurred on

the later of: (i) the date that the Work passes a Final Completion inspection or (ii) the date that the Builder has produced all required Final Completion close-out documentation and items. Final Completion shall not be deemed to have occurred and no final payment shall be due the Builder or any of its subcontractors or suppliers until the Work has passed the Final Completion inspection and all required Final Completion close-out documentation and items have been produced to the Owner by the Builder.

12.2.1 When the Builder believes the Work is finally complete, the Builder shall notify

the Owner and the Professional that the Work is ready for Final Completion inspection.

12.2.2 Upon receipt of such notification from the Builder, the Professional will coordinate

with the Owner and the Builder a date for inspection of the Work to determine whether the Work is finally complete.

12.2.3 At the Final Completion inspection to determine whether the Work is finally

complete, the Professional will: (i) inspect the Work; (ii) determine whether all items on the list included with the Certificate of

Substantial Completion have been satisfactorily completed and corrected; (iii) determine whether the Work complies with (a) the Contract for

Construction; (b) applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules or regulations of all governmental, public and quasi-public authorities and agencies having jurisdiction over the Project; and (c) applicable installation and workmanship standards;

GTC-23 June 19, 2006

(iv) determine whether required inspections and approvals by the official(s) having or asserting jurisdiction over the Project have been satisfactorily completed; and

(v) determine, in consultation with the Owner, whether the Work is finally

complete. 12.2.4 If the Work is not finally complete, the Builder shall continue to prosecute the

Work, and the inspection process shall be repeated at no additional cost to the Owner, until the Work is finally complete.

12.2.5 On or prior to the date of Final Completion, the Builder shall deliver to the

Professional the following Final Completion close-out documentation and items: (i) Certificate of Final Completion – executed on Owner’s standard form;

(ii) all operation and maintenance manuals not previously produced; (iii) Owner maintenance or “attic” stock as prescribed in the technical

specifications; (iii) one (1) set of as-built plans and specifications; (iv) certification and affidavit that all insurance required of the Builder beyond

final payment, if any, is in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire without notice to the Owner;

(v) written consent of the surety(ies), if any, to final payment; (vi) full, final and unconditional waivers of mechanics or construction liens,

from each contractor, subcontractor, supplier or other person or entity who has, or might have a claim;

(vii) full, final and unconditional certification and affidavit that all of the

Builder’s obligations to contractors, subcontractors, suppliers and other third parties for payment for labor, materials or equipment related to the Project have been paid or otherwise satisfied;

(viii) all written warranties and guarantees relating to the labor, goods,

products, materials, equipment and systems incorporated into the Work, endorsed, countersigned, and assigned as necessary;

(ix) affidavits, releases, bonds, waivers, permits and other documents

necessary for final close-out of Work; (x) a list of any item(s) due but unable to be delivered and the reason for

non-delivery; and (xi) any other documents reasonably and customarily required or expressly

required herein for full and final close-out of the Work.

GTC-24 June 19, 2006

12.2.6 The Professional will review and determine the sufficiency of all Final Completion close-out documentation and items required for Final Completion which are submitted by the Builder, and will immediately inform the Builder about any deficiencies and omissions.

ARTICLE 13 BUILDER’S WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES

13.1 One-Year Warranty. In addition to the warranties and guarantees set forth elsewhere in

the Contract for Construction, the Builder, upon request by the Owner or the Professional, shall promptly correct all failures or defects in the Work for a period of one year after the actual date of Substantial Completion, or the date of acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later.

13.1.1 The Builder shall schedule, coordinate and participate in a walk-through

inspection of the Work one month prior to the expiration of the one-year correction period, and shall notify the Owner, the Professional, and any necessary subcontractors and suppliers of the date of, and request their participation in, the walk-through inspection. The purpose of the walk-through inspection will be to determine if there are defects or failures which require correction.

13.1.2 Should the Builder fail to promptly correct any failure or defect, the Owner may

take whatever actions it deems necessary to remedy the failure or defect and the Builder shall promptly reimburse the Owner for any expenses or damages it incurs as a result of the Builder 's failure to correct the failure or defect.

13.2 Express Warranties And Guarantees – Builder. In addition to the warranties and

guarantees set forth elsewhere herein, the Builder expressly warrants and guarantees to the Owner:

(i) that the Work complies with (a) the Construction Documents; and (b) all

applicable laws, statutes, building codes, rules and regulations of all governmental, public and quasi-public authorities and agencies having jurisdiction over the Project.

(ii) that all goods, products, materials, equipment and systems incorporated into the

Work conform to applicable specifications, descriptions, instructions, drawings, data and samples and shall be and are (a) new (unless otherwise specified or permitted) and without apparent damage or defect; (b) of quality equal to or higher than that required by the Construction Documents; and (c) merchantable; and

(iii) that all management, supervision, labor and services required for the Work shall

comply with the Contract for Construction and shall be and are performed in a workmanlike manner.

13.3 Express Warranties And Guarantees - Subcontractors And Suppliers. The Builder

shall require that all of its subcontractors and suppliers provide written warranties, guarantees and other undertakings to the Owner and the Builder in a form identical to

GTC-25 June 19, 2006

the warranties, guarantees and other undertakings set forth in the Contract for Construction, including the warranties, guarantees and undertakings set forth in this Article, which warranties, guarantees and undertakings shall run to the benefit of the Owner as well as the Builder.

13.4 Non-Exclusivity And Survival. The warranties and guarantees set forth in this Article

shall be in addition to all other warranties, express, implied or statutory, and shall survive the Owner’s payment, acceptance, inspection of or failure to inspect the Work, and review of the Construction Documents.

13.5 Non-Limitation. Nothing contained in Paragraph 13.1, shall be construed to establish a

period of limitation with respect to the Builder’s obligations under the Contract for Construction. Paragraph 13.1 relates only to the Builder’s specific obligations with respect to the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the Builder’s contractual obligations under the Contract for Construction may be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Builder 's liability with respect to any contractual obligations pursuant to Paragraph 13.1 or contained elsewhere herein.

13.6 Commencement Of Obligations. Unless otherwise specified, all of the Builder’s

warranty and guaranty obligations, including the time period(s) for all written warranties and guarantees of specifically designated equipment required by the Construction Documents, shall begin on the actual date of Substantial Completion or the date of acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later.

ARTICLE 14 OWNER’S DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

14.1 Timely Compensation Of Builder. The Owner shall timely compensate the Builder in

accordance with the Contract for Construction. 14.2 Owner Review Of Documents. The Owner shall review documents prepared by the

Builder in a timely manner and in accordance with schedule requirements. Review by the Owner shall be solely for the purpose of determining whether such documents are generally consistent with the Owner's intent. No review of such documents shall relieve the Builder of any of its responsibilities. In addition, the Owner’s review of documents for purposes of issuing a building permit shall not relieve the Builder of any of its responsibilities.

14.3 Status Of Owner. The Owner shall not have control or charge of construction means,

methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, nor shall the Builder, for any of the foregoing purposes, be deemed the agent of the Owner.

14.4 Owner’s Utilities. The Builder shall be responsible to provide and pay for consumption

of, and connections to, utilities required for temporary service and construction.

GTC-26 June 19, 2006

ARTICLE 15 BUILDER’S COMPENSATION

15.1 Unit Prices. If any portion of the Construction Price is determined by the application of

unit prices, the number of units contained in the Builder’s Compensation Schedule is an estimate only, and the compensation to the Builder shall be determined by the actual number of units incorporated in, or required by, the Work.

15.2 Schedule Of Values. The Builder shall prepare and present to the Owner and the

Professional the Builder’s schedule of values, apportioning the different elements of the Work for purposes of periodic and final payment. The Builder's schedule of values shall be presented in the format, and with such detail and supporting information, requested by the Professional or Owner. The Builder shall not imbalance or artificially inflate any element of its schedule of values. Upon the Professional and Owner’s acceptance, the schedule of values shall be used to process and pay the Builder’s payment requests. The schedule of values shall not be changed without written change order authorized by the Owner.

15.3 Trench Safety Act. The Builder shall comply with the Trench Safety Act (Chapter 553,

Part VI, Florida Statutes) which requires that builders delineate in their Schedules of Values the cost of compliance with applicable trench safety standards.

15.4 Invoicing Procedures. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth

in the Owner’s policies PMG-B16 and PMG-B17, the Builder shall invoice the Owner and the Owner shall pay the Builder the Construction Price.

15.4.1 The Builder shall submit invoices to the Professional requesting payment for

labor and services rendered during the preceding thirty calendar days. Each invoice shall contain such detail and be backed up with whatever supporting information the Owner or a Professional requests and shall at a minimum state:

(i) the total original Construction Price and total current Construction Price;

(ii) the amount due for properly provided labor, materials and equipment

properly incorporated into the Project; and with respect to amounts invoiced for materials or equipment necessary for the Project and properly stored at the Site (or elsewhere if offsite storage is approved in writing by the Owner), be accompanied by written proof that the Owner has title to such materials or equipment and that such material and equipment is fully insured against loss or damage;

(iii) a breakdown of the various phases, bid packages, or parts of the Work as

related to the Construction Price in accordance with standard Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) format;

(iv) the value of the various phases, bid packages, or parts of the Work

actually performed;

(v) previously invoiced amounts and credit payments made;

(vi) the total amount due, less any agreed retainage; and

GTC-27 June 19, 2006

(vii) a summary of change orders to date.

and shall also have attached such lien waiver and other documentation verifying the Builder’s payment to subcontractors and suppliers as the Owner or Professional may request.

15.5 Payment Procedures.

15.5.1 Within seven (7) days of receipt, the Professional will review the Builder’s applications for payment, including such accompanying data, information and schedules as the Professional requires, to determine the amounts due to the Builder and, based upon such review, together with its inspections of the Work, shall authorize payment by the Owner to the Builder in writing. Such authorization will constitute the Professional’s certification to the Owner that:

(i) the Work described in the Builder’s invoice has progressed to the level

indicated and has been performed in accordance with the Contract For Construction;

(ii) all necessary and appropriate lien waivers have been submitted; (iii) the “as-built” record documents are current and up-to-date; and

(iii) the amount requested is currently due and owing to the Builder.

15.5.2 In the case of unit price work, the Professional’s recommendations for payment

will constitute a final determination of quantities and classifications of such work. 15.6 Owner’s Right To Refuse Payment. A Professional’s approval of the Builder’s invoice

shall not preclude the Owner from exercising any of its remedies under the Contract for Construction. In the event of a dispute, payment shall be made on or before the date provided in Section 15.6 for amounts not in dispute, subject to any setoffs claimed by the Owner. The Owner shall have the right to refuse to make payment and, if necessary, may demand the return of a portion or all of the amount previously paid to the Builder due to:

(i) the Builder's failure to perform the Work in compliance with the requirements of

the Contract for Construction or any other agreement between the parties; (ii) the Builder’s failure to correctly and accurately represent the Work performed in a

payment request, or otherwise; (iii) the Builder’s performance of the Work at a rate or in a manner that, in the

Owner's opinion, is likely to result in the Project or any portion of the Project being inexcusably delayed;

(iv) the Builder’s failure to use funds previously paid the Builder by the Owner, to pay

the Builder’s Project-related obligations including, but not limited to, the Builder’s subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers;

GTC-28 June 19, 2006

(v) claims made, or likely to be made, against the Owner; (vi) loss caused by the Builder or the Builder’s subcontractors, or suppliers; or (vii) the Builder’s failure or refusal to perform any of its obligations to the Owner.

15.7 Builder’s Right To Refuse Performance For Non-Payment. If, within twenty calendar days from the receipt of the Builder’s application for payment properly prepared pursuant to Owner’s policies PMG-B-16 and 17. and approved by the Professional, the Owner, without cause or basis hereunder, fails to pay the Builder any amounts then due and payable to the Builder, the Builder shall have the right, in addition to all other rights and remedies contained herein, to cease performance of the Work until receipt of proper payment after first providing fourteen calendar days written notice to the Owner of its intent to cease work.

15.8 Correction Of Past Payments. All prior payments, whether based on estimates or

otherwise, may be corrected and adjusted in any subsequent payment and shall be corrected and adjusted in the final payment. In the event that any invoice contains a defect or impropriety which would prevent payment by the date due, the Owner shall notify the Builder in writing of such defect or impropriety. Any disputed amounts determined by the Owner to be payable to the Builder shall be due thirty calendar days from the date the dispute is resolved.

15.9 Invoice Warranties And Guarantees. The Builder expressly warrants and guarantees

to the Owner that:

(i) title to all goods, products, materials, equipment and systems covered by an invoice will pass to the Owner either by incorporation into the Work, or upon receipt of payment by the Builder, whichever occurs first;

(ii) all goods, products, materials, equipment and systems covered by an invoice are

free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances; and (iii) no goods, products, materials, equipment or systems covered by an invoice have

been acquired by the Builder, or its subcontractors or suppliers, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Builder, or its subcontractors or suppliers.

15.10 Builder’s Signature. The signature of the Builder on any invoice constitutes the

Builder’s certification to the Owner that (i) the Builder’s services listed in the invoice have progressed to the level indicated and have been performed as required by the Contract for Construction; (ii) the Builder has paid its subcontractors and suppliers their proportional share of all previous payments received from the Owner; (iii) the amount requested is currently due and owing; and (iv) all subcontractors performing the Work for which payment is made hold all necessary State of Florida licenses.

15.11 Taxes. The Builder shall incorporate into the Construction Price, and pay, all sales,

consumer, use and similar taxes for goods, products, materials, equipment and systems incorporated into the Work which were legally required at the time of execution of the Contract for Construction, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into

GTC-29 June 19, 2006

effect. The Builder shall cooperate with and assist the Owner in securing qualified refunds of any sales or use tax paid by the Owner or Builder on goods, products, materials, equipment or systems. Any refund secured shall be paid to the Owner.

15.12 Compensation Of Builder’s Subcontractors And Suppliers. Forty five (45) days

after satisfactory completion of their portion of the Work, subcontractors may invoice Builder for remaining unpaid Work, including the full value of the retainage related to such Work less the value of any contested item(s), and provided each such subcontractor has provided Builder with all required close-out documentation. Builder shall include subcontractor pay requests in the Builder’s application for payment. No later than ten days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the Builder shall pay each of its subcontractors and suppliers out of the amount received by the Builder on account of such subcontractor’s or supplier’s portion of the Work, the amount to which each entity is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Builder on account of such entity’s portion of the Work, if any. The Owner shall have no obligation to pay, and shall not be responsible for payments to, the Builder’s subcontractors or suppliers. However, the Owner reserves the right, but has no duty, to make payment jointly to the Builder and to any of its subcontractors or suppliers in the event that the Owner becomes aware that the Builder fails to pay or unreasonably withholds payment from one or more of those entities. Such joint check procedure, if employed by the Owner, shall create no rights in favor of any person or entity beyond the right of the named payees to payment of the check and shall not be deemed to commit the Owner to repeat the procedure in the future.

15.13 Retainage. Subject to Section 15.11, retainage shall be withheld from each payment, in

an amount not to exceed ten percent (10%) of the approved payment amount. At such time as the Work is at least 75% complete, the Owner may, in its sole and absolute discretion, reduce the amount of retainage required below ten percent (10%) on subsequent applications for payment.

15.14 Final Payment. Prior to being entitled to receive final payment, and as a condition

precedent thereto, the Builder must achieve Final Completion. The Owner shall, subject to its rights set forth above in this Article, make final payment of all sums due the Builder within fourteen calendar days of a Professional’s execution of a final approval for payment.

ARTICLE 16 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

16.1 Construction Schedule. The Construction Schedule shall include all pertinent dates

and periods for timely completion of the Work.

16.1.1 Unless otherwise directed and approved by the Owner, the Builder shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of the Notice To Proceed, prepare a Critical Path Method schedule with separate divisions for each major portion of the Work or operations. The Construction Schedule shall include and properly coordinate dates for performance of all divisions of the Work, including completion of off-Site requirements and tasks, so that the Work can be completed in a timely and orderly fashion consistent with the required dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion. When preparing the schedule Builder shall consider and

GTC-30 June 19, 2006

account for Owner’s operational needs on the site and adjacent thereto, particularly with regard to utility interruptions and access restrictions.

16.1.2 The Construction Schedule shall depict all activities necessary for, or incidental

to, performance of the Work, showing the logic (sequence, dependency), duration, and “float” of each activity, with the critical path highlighted and shall include (i) the required Commencement Date, the required dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion; (ii) any guideline and milestone dates required by the Owner; (iii) any applicable subcontractor and supplier subschedules; (iv) coordination with the submittal schedule which allows sufficient time for review of documents and submittals; (v) allowances for procurement, fabrication, and delivery of materials, especially “long lead” items; (vi) the complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction; (vii) the time required for testing, inspections, and commissioning, if applicable; (viii) time for schedule constraints, such as holidays and events on Owner’s property and adverse weather conditions which are normal and may be reasonably anticipated; and (ix) required decision dates.

16.1.3 By reviewing the Construction Schedule, the Owner and Professional do not

assume any of the Builder’s responsibility (i) that the Construction Schedule be coordinated or complete; or (ii) for timely and orderly completion by the required dates of Substantial Completion, Final Completion and any milestone dates required by the Owner.

16.1.4 The Builder shall review, on a weekly basis, the actual status of the Work against

the Construction Schedule. The Builder shall discuss the status of the Work bi-weekly with the Professional and Owner, so that proper overall management may be provided.

16.1.5 The Builder shall periodically and in all instances when the Builder anticipates

that performance of the Work will be delayed or in fact has been delayed, but not less frequently than monthly, prepare a revised Construction Schedule and show actual progress of the Work through the revision date, projected completion of each remaining activity, activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. The updated Construction Schedule shall be accompanied by a narrative report which (i) states and explains any modifications of the critical path schedule, including any changes in logic; (ii) defines problem areas and lists areas of anticipated delays; (iii) explains the anticipated impact the problems and delays will have on the schedule and scheduled activities; (iv) reports corrective action taken or proposed; and (v) states how problems anticipated by projections shown on the schedule will be resolved to avoid delay in delivering the Work by the required dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion, and other milestone dates required by the Owner, if any.

16.2 Delay In Performance. If at any time the Builder anticipates that performance of the

Work will be delayed or in fact has been delayed, the Builder shall (i) immediately notify the Professional of the probable cause of and effect from the delay, and possible alternatives to minimize the delay; and (ii) take all corrective actions reasonably

GTC-31 June 19, 2006

necessary to deliver the Work by the required dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion, and other milestone dates required by the Owner, if any.

16.3 Modifications of Time For Performance. The Builder may submit delay claims or

otherwise propose modifications of the required dates of Substantial Completion or Final Completion, or other milestone dates required by the Owner, if any. However, such claims shall be submitted in writing and supported by evidence that the delay was excusable, critical, and compensable. The Builder shall determine and promptly notify the Owner and the Professional in writing when it believes such adjustments are necessary, but no such adjustments shall be effective unless approved in writing by the Owner and Professional.

16.3.1 Modification(s) of the required dates of Substantial Completion or Final

Completion shall be accomplished only by duly authorized and accepted change order(s) stating the new date(s) with specificity and reciting that all references in the Contract For Construction to the required dates of Substantial Completion or Final Completion shall thereafter refer to the date(s) as modified, and all rights and obligations, including the Builder’s liability for actual damages, delay damages and liquidated damages, shall be determined in relation to the date(s) as modified.

16.4 Early Completion. The Builder may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion before

the required date of Substantial Completion. However, such planned early completion shall be for the Builder’s sole convenience and shall not create any additional Builder rights or Owner obligations under the Contract for Construction, nor shall it change the required dates of Substantial Completion or Final Completion. The Owner shall not pay the Builder any additional compensation for achievement of Substantial Completion or Final Completion prior to the required dates nor will the Owner owe the Builder any compensation should the Owner cause the Builder not to achieve Substantial Completion earlier than the required date of Substantial Completion or Final Completion earlier than the required date of Final Completion.

16.5 Document Review. The Builder shall provide documents to the Owner and

Professional(s) for review in accordance with schedule requirements and with sufficient lead time to allow the Owner and Professional reasonable time for review.

ARTICLE 17 TIME OF PERFORMANCE

17.1 Time Of The Essence. The parties hereto mutually understand and agree that time is

of the essence in the performance of the Contract for Construction and that the Owner will incur damages if the Work is not completed on time. The Builder shall at all times carry out its duties and responsibilities as expeditiously as possible and shall begin, perform and complete its services so that (i) the Work progresses in accordance with the Construction Schedule; (ii) the Work is substantially completed by the required date of Substantial Completion; and (iii) the Work is finally complete by the date of Final Completion.

17.2 Delay Claims. The Builder may submit delay claims or otherwise propose modifications

of the required dates of Substantial Completion or Final Completion, or other milestone

GTC-32 June 19, 2006

dates required by the Owner, if any. However, such claims shall be submitted in writing and supported by evidence that the delay was excusable, critical, and, if applicable, compensable. Extensions of time will be granted only to the extent that equitable time adjustments for the effected activity or activities exceed the total float along the network paths involved. Such claims shall include an estimate of cost, if any, and substantiate the projected impact on the overall critical path schedule of the Project. In the case of a continuing delay, only one claim is necessary.

17.2.1 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a delay claim, the claim shall be

documented by data substantiating that: the weather conditions were abnormal for the given location and period of time; the weather conditions could not have been reasonably anticipated; and that the weather conditions had an adverse effect on the overall critical path of the schedule. Delays caused by adverse weather conditions are not compensable.

17.3 Compensable Delay. If the Builder is delayed at any time in the progress or

performance of the Work by (i) acts or omissions of the Owner or Professional; (ii) major changes ordered by the Owner in the scope of Work; or (iii) any other cause which the Owner determines may justify the compensation of the Builder for the delay, the Builder’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted to cover the Builder’s actual and direct increased costs attributable to such delay.

17.4 Excusable Delay. If the Builder is delayed at any time in the progress or performance

of the Work by (i) acts or omissions of the Owner or Professional; (ii) major changes ordered by the Owner in the scope of Work; (iii) fire; (iv) unusual delays in transportation; (v) adverse abnormal weather conditions not reasonably anticipated by the Builder; (vi) unavoidable casualties; (vii) causes beyond the Builder's control which the Owner agrees in writing are justifiable; or (viii) any other cause which the Owner determines may justify the delay, the time for performance may be extended to allow for a demonstrated increase in overall construction duration, which may or may not be equal to the length of such delay, but only if (a) such delay is not concurrent with other, inexcusable delay(s); (b) such delay impacts the critical path; (c) such delay is not in any way caused by default or collusion on the part of the Builder or by any cause which the Builder could reasonably control or circumvent; (d) the Builder would have otherwise been able to timely perform all of its obligations under the Contract for Construction but for such delay; and (e) immediately but not later than fourteen (14) calendar days after the beginning of any such delay the Builder gives notice of its delay claim to the Owner. Such delay claims may be submitted by change order request. All such claims will be reviewed by the Professional within seven (7) days of submission. Delay caused by labor disputes, picketing, employee boycotts, or the like which directly or indirectly involves employees of the Builder or its subcontractors and suppliers is not the responsibility of the Owner and will result in time extensions only if agreed to in writing by the Owner at the time such events arise.

GTC-33 June 19, 2006

ARTICLE 18 CONCEALED AND UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS

18.1 Notification Regarding Unusual Conditions. If (i) the Builder encounters concealed

and unforeseen conditions of an unusual nature which affect the performance of the Work; or (ii) the conditions vary from those indicated by the Construction Documents; and (iii) such conditions are not ordinarily found to exist or differ materially from those generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided by the Builder, the Builder shall promptly, but in no event later than three calendar days after first observance of the conditions, notify the Professional and the Owner before conditions are disturbed and give the Professional or the Owner opportunity to observe the condition in its undisturbed state. 18.1.1 The conditions will be promptly investigated and, if they differ substantially and

cause a material increase or decrease in the Builder 's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work, compensation or time for performance or both will be equitably adjusted.

18.1.2 All adjustments in compensation or extensions of time shall be by change order.

Change order requests must be made within fourteen calendar days from the date of observation of the changed conditions.

18.1.3 The Builder's failure to notify the Professional and Owner as provided in this

Article shall constitute a waiver of any claim arising out of or relating to such concealed or unknown condition.

ARTICLE 19

PROPRIETARY DOCUMENTS AND CONFIDENTIALITY 19.1 Nature And Use Of Information. All information, documents, and electronic media

furnished by the Owner to the Builder (i) belong to the Owner; (ii) are proprietary and confidential; (iii) are furnished solely for use on the Owner’s Project; (iv), shall be kept confidential by the Builder; and (v) shall not be used by the Builder on any other project or in connection with any other person or entity, unless disclosure or use thereof in connection with any matter other than services rendered to the Owner hereunder is specifically authorized in writing by the Owner in advance or is required by law. The Owner hereby grants to the Builder a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Construction Documents necessary for execution of the Work. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the documents.

19.2 Ownership Of Information. All information, documents, and electronic media prepared

by or on behalf of the Builder for the Project are the sole property of the Owner free of any retention rights of the Builder. The Builder hereby grants to the Owner an unconditional right to use, for any purpose whatsoever, any information, documents or electronic media prepared by or on behalf of the Builder for the Project, free of any copyright claims, trade secrets or other proprietary rights with respect to such documents.

GTC-34 June 19, 2006

19.3 Disclosure Of Information. The Builder shall not disclose any information it receives from the Owner to any other person or entity except to the extent necessary to allow it to perform its duties under the Contract for Construction or as required by law.

19.4 Instructions To Employees. Because it is difficult to separate proprietary and

confidential information from that which is not, the Builder shall instruct its employees and agents to regard all information which is not in the public domain as information which is proprietary and confidential.

19.5 Non-Publication. Submission or distribution of documents to meet official regulatory

requirements or for other required purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Owner's common law copyrights or other reserved rights.

ARTICLE 20 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

20.1 Basic Insurance Requirements. The Builder shall maintain the following insurances

with a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in Florida, and with an A.M. Best Rating of no less than A, X. All insurance policies shall be issued and countersigned by duly authorized representatives of such companies and shall be written on ISO standard forms or their equivalents. The insurance policies shall require that the insurer shall provide at least thirty (30) days written notice to Owner if a policy is to be canceled or the coverage thereunder reduced before the expiration date thereof and Builder shall provide Owner with a copy of an endorsement to the policy evidencing the same. The insurance required hereunder shall be carried by Builder at least until the Project is finally completed and accepted by Owner. Owner may require the Builder and its subbuilders to carry additional types and amounts of insurance it deems appropriate given the nature and size of a particular Project. In such case, Owner shall notify Builder within a reasonable period of time prior to the commencement of the Work of such additional requirements.

20.1.1 Liability Insurance. 20.1.1.1. Commercial General Liability Insurance.

The Builder shall provide a commercial general liability insurance policy which has liability limits of at least $1,000,000.00 per occurrence for bodily injury, death and property damage. The University of Florida Board of Trustees and the Board of Governors shall be named as additional insureds on such policy and the policy shall provide cross liability coverage. Such insurance policy shall protect Builder from claims which may arise whether such claims may arise out of the operations of the Builder or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Builder. In addition, the policy shall contain the following endorsements (i) “XCU” (explosion, collapse, underground damage) for those classifications excluded under the policy and (ii) contractual liability. If Builder is performing asbestos-related work, the policy shall also contain a pollution liability endorsement.

GTC-35 June 19, 2006

20.1.1.2. Automobile Liability Insurance.

Builder shall carry an automobile liability insurance which has liability limits of at least $500,000.00. The University of Florida Board of Trustees and Board of Governors shall be named as additional insureds on such policy and the policy shall provide cross liability coverage.

20.1.1.3. Deductibles.

Deductibles under these liability policies shall not exceed $5,000.00. Owner shall not be liable for amounts that may represent a deductible in any insurance policy. The payment of such deductible shall be the sole responsibility of the Builder and/or subBuilder providing such insurance.

20.1.2 Worker’s Compensation.

Builder shall maintain worker’s compensation insurance which complies with the requirements of Chapter 440, Florida Statutes.

20.1.3 Builder’s Risk Insurance.

The Builder shall maintain builder’s risk insurance, at replacement cost, covering the full value of the construction being performed, including where applicable, the existing structure. Such policy shall be written on a causes of loss special form policy, and shall include coverage for reasonable compensation for the Architect/Engineer’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. This insurance shall insure the interests of the Builder, subbuilders and sub-subbuilders in the Work. Property covered by the insurance shall include temporary building(s) or structure(s) at the Project site, other than any of Builder’s office trailer(s). In addition, such insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, after written approval of the Owner, at the value established in the approval, and portions of the Work in transit. The University of Florida Board of Trustees and Florida Board of Governors shall be named as additional insureds on such policy. The policy shall include a waiver of subrogation endorsement and a severability of interests endorsement. The deductible under the policy shall not exceed $5,000.00. Owner shall not be liable for amounts that may represent a deductible in any insurance policy. The payment of such deductible shall be the sole responsibility of the Builder. When the Work includes the repair, removal, installation and/or testing of live steam boilers, valves, pipes or lines, then such insurance shall include boiler and machine coverage, written on an ISO form or its equivalent. A loss or losses insured under this insurance policy shall be adjusted by the Builder and its insurance company. The Builder shall repair or replace the

GTC-36 June 19, 2006

damaged property with the proceeds from the builder’s risk policy. The Builder shall be responsible for all damages and necessary repairs whether or not the loss is covered by the builder’s risk policy.

20.2 Certificates of Insurance. Certificates of Insurance and/or evidence of insurance for all

insurance required to carried under this Article, together with certified copies of the insurance policies (including required endorsements), shall be filed with, and approved by, the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. The Certificates of Insurance shall be dated and show the name of the insurer, the number of the policy, its effective date, and its termination date. Owner will not issue a Notice to Proceed for the Work until Builder has complied with this Article. Builder shall not be entitled to an extension of time or to compensation which may result from delays in the issuance of a Notice to Proceed caused by its failure to provide the foregoing certificates and policies in a timely manner. Certificates of Insurance evidencing the renewal of all insurance required to be carried under this Article shall be provided to Owner at least thirty (30) days prior to the date each applicable insurance policy is scheduled to expire. Owner’s review, inspection, or approval of Builder’s insurance shall not relieve Builder of its responsibility for providing the insurance required hereby nor constitute a waiver of any such requirements.

20.3 Effect Of Insurance. Compliance with insurance requirements shall not relieve the

Builder of any responsibility to indemnify the Owner for any liability to the Owner as specified in any other provision of the Contract for Construction, and the Owner shall be entitled to pursue any remedy in law or equity if the Builder fails to comply with the contractual provisions of the Contract for Construction. Indemnity obligations specified elsewhere in the Contract for Construction shall not be negated or reduced by virtue of any insurance carrier's (i) denial of insurance coverage for the occurrence or event which is the subject matter of the claim; or (ii) refusal to defend any named insured.

20.4 Waiver Of Subrogation. The Builder hereby releases and discharges the Owner and

the Owner’s Related Parties of and from all liability to the Builder, and to anyone claiming by, through or under the Builder, by subrogation or otherwise, on account of any loss or damage to tools, machinery, equipment or other property, however caused. The Builder shall cause its builder’s risk property insurance company to issue a waiver of subrogation consistent with this provision.

ARTICLE 21 GENERAL BOND REQUIREMENTS

21.1 General Bond Requirements. Recognizing the Project is a public project with a

Construction Price which exceeds $100,000.00, and as such is required to be bonded pursuant to 255.05, Florida Statutes, the Builder shall furnish Payment and Performance bonds on Owner’s standard form covering the full and faithful performance of the Contract for Construction and the payment of obligations arising hereunder.

21.2 Requests for Copies of Bonds. Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to

be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract for Construction, the Builder shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made.

GTC-37 June 19, 2006

21.3 Delivery Of Bonds. The Builder shall deliver required bonds and powers of attorney to the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.

ARTICLE 22 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK

22.1 Cease And Desist Order. If the Builder fails or refuses to perform or fails to correct

defective Work as required, or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract For Construction, the Owner may, by written notice, order the Builder to cease and desist in performing the Work or any portion of the Work until the cause for the order has been eliminated to the satisfaction of the Owner. Upon receipt of such instruction, the Builder shall immediately cease and desist as instructed by the Owner and shall not proceed further until the cause for the Owner’s order has been corrected, no longer exists, or the Owner instructs that the Work may resume.

22.1.1 The Builder shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the time for performance or

the Construction Price under this clause since such stoppages are considered to be the fault of the Builder.

22.1.2 The right of the Owner to stop Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the

Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Builder or others. 22.1.3 In the event the Owner issues instructions to cease and desist, and in the further

event that the Builder fails and refuses with seven calendar days to provide adequate assurance to the Owner that the cause of such instructions will be eliminated or corrected, then the Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to carry out the Work or any portion of the Work with its own forces, or with the forces of another builder, and the Builder shall be responsible for the cost of performing such Work by the Owner.

22.1.4 The rights set forth herein are in addition to, and without prejudice to, any other

rights or remedies the Owner may have against the Builder.

ARTICLE 23 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

23.1 Termination For Cause By Owner.

23.1.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract for Construction for cause if the Builder materially breaches the Contract for Construction by:

(i) refusing, failing or being unable to properly manage or perform on any

Project; (ii) refusing, failing or being unable to supply the Project with sufficient

numbers of workers, properly skilled workers, proper materials to maintain applicable schedules;

GTC-38 June 19, 2006

(iii) refusing, failing or being unable to make prompt payment to subcontractors or suppliers;

(iv) disregarding laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public

authority or quasi-public authority having jurisdiction over the Project; (v) refusing, failing or being unable to substantially perform in accordance

with the terms of the Contract For Construction as determined by the Owner, or as otherwise defined elsewhere herein; or

(vi) refusing, failing or being unable to substantially perform in accordance

with the terms of any other agreement between the Owner and Builder.

23.1.2 Upon the occurrence of any of the events described in Paragraph 23.1.1, the Owner may give written notice to the Builder setting forth the nature of the default and requesting cure within seven calendar days from the date of notice. At any time thereafter, if the Builder fails to initiate the cure or if the Builder fails to expeditiously continue such cure until complete, the Owner may give written notice to the Builder of immediate termination, and the Owner, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies, may take any or all of the following actions:

(i) complete all or any part of the Work, including supplying workers, material

and equipment which the Owner deems expedient to complete the Work; (ii) contract with others to complete all or any part of the Work, including

supplying workers, material and equipment which the Owner deems expedient to complete the Work;

(iii) take such other action as is necessary to correct such failure;

(vi) take possession of all materials, tools, construction equipment and

machinery on the Site owned or leased by the Builder; (v) directly pay the Builder’s subcontractors and suppliers compensation due

to them from the Builder; (vi) finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient; and (vii) require the Builder to assign the Builder’s right, title and interest in any or

all of Builder’s subcontracts or orders to the Owner.

23.1.3 If the Owner terminates the Contract For Construction for cause, and the Owner takes possession of all materials, tools, construction equipment and machinery on the Site owned or leased by the Builder, the Builder’s compensation shall be increased by fair payment, either by purchase or rental at the election of the Owner, for any materials, tools, construction equipment and machinery items retained, subject to the Owner’s right to recover from the Builder the Owner’s damages resulting from the termination.

GTC-39 June 19, 2006

23.1.4 If the Owner terminates the Contract for Construction for cause, and it is subsequently determined by a court of competent jurisdiction that such termination was without cause, then in such event, said termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience as set forth in Paragraph 24.3.

23.2 Termination For Cause By Builder.

23.2.1 The Builder may terminate the Contract for Construction for cause if the Owner materially breaches the Contract for Construction by:

(i) refusing, failing or being unable to make prompt payment to the Builder

without just cause; (ii) disregarding laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public

authority of quasi-public authority having jurisdiction over any Project; or refusing, failing or being unable to substantially perform in accordance with the terms of the Contract for Construction.

23.2.2 Upon the occurrence of any of the events described in Paragraph 23.2.1, the

Builder may give written notice to the Owner setting forth the nature of the default and requesting cure within seven calendar days from the date of notice. If the Owner fails to cure the default within seven calendar days, the Builder, without prejudice to any rights or remedies, may give written notice to the Owner of immediate termination.

23.3 Termination Or Suspension For Convenience. The Owner may at any time give

written notice to the Builder terminating the Contract for Construction or suspending the Project, in whole or in part, for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. If the Owner suspends the Project for convenience, the Builder shall immediately reduce its staff, services and outstanding commitments in order to minimize the cost of suspension.

23.4 Builder’s Compensation When Builder Terminates For Cause Or Owner

Terminates For Convenience. If the Contract for Construction is (i) terminated by the Builder pursuant to Paragraph 23.2; (ii) terminated by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 23.3; or (iii) suspended more than three months by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 23.3, the Owner shall pay the Builder specified amounts due for Work actually performed prior to the effective termination date and reasonable costs associated with termination. The Owner may agree to additional compensation, if any, due to the Builder. Absent agreement on the additional amount due the Builder, the Owner shall pay the Builder:

(i) reasonable costs incurred in preparing to perform the terminated portion of the

Work, and in terminating the Builder's performance, plus a fair and reasonable allowance for overhead and profit thereon (such profit shall not include anticipated profit or consequential damages); provided, however, that if it appears that the Builder would not have profited or would have sustained a loss if the Work had been completed, no profit shall be allowed or included, and the amount of compensation shall be reduced to reflect the anticipated rates of loss, if any; and

GTC-40 June 19, 2006

(ii) reasonable costs of settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts or supplier orders. These costs shall not include amounts paid in accordance with other provisions hereof.

23.5 Builder’s Compensation When Owner Terminates For Cause. If the Contract for

Construction is terminated by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 23.1, no further payment shall be made to the Builder until Final Completion of the Project. At such time, the Builder shall be paid the remainder of the Construction Price less all costs and damages incurred by the Owner as a result of the default of the Builder, including liquidated damages applicable thereto. The Builder shall additionally reimburse the Owner for any additional costs or expenses incurred.

23.6 Limitation On Termination Compensation. Irrespective of the reason for termination

or the party terminating, the total sum paid to the Builder shall not exceed the Construction Price, as properly adjusted, reduced by the amount of payments previously made and penalties or deductions incurred pursuant to any other provision of the Contract for Construction, and shall in no event include duplication of payment.

23.7 Builder’s Responsibility Upon Termination. Irrespective of the reason for termination

or the party terminating, if the Contract for Construction is terminated, the Builder shall, unless notified otherwise by the Owner,

(i) immediately stop work;

(ii) terminate outstanding orders and subcontracts; (iii) settle the liabilities and claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts and

orders; and (iv) transfer title and deliver to the Owner such completed or partially completed

Work, and, if paid for by the Owner, materials, equipment, parts, fixtures, information and such contract rights as the Builder has.

23.8 Lack Of Duty To Terminate. The right to terminate or suspend the Work shall not give

rise to a duty on the part of either the Owner or the Builder to exercise that right for the benefit of the Owner, the Builder or any other persons or entities.

23.9 Limitation On Termination Claim. If the Builder fails to file a claim within one year

from the effective date of termination, the Owner shall pay the Builder only for services actually performed and expenses actually incurred prior to the effective termination date.

ARTICLE 24 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

24.1 Mutual Discussion. In case of any dispute, claim, question or disagreement arising

from or relating to the Project or arising out of the Contract for Construction or the breach thereof, the parties shall first attempt resolution through mutual discussion.

24.2 Facilitative Mediation. If the parties cannot resolve any dispute, claim, question, or

disagreement arising from or relating to the Project or arising out of the Contract for

GTC-41 June 19, 2006

Construction or the breach thereof through mutual discussion, as a condition precedent to any litigation or administrative action, the parties shall in good faith participate in private, non-binding facilitative mediation seeking a just and equitable solution satisfactory to all parties.

24.2.1 All parties to a mediation shall promptly provide all other parties to the mediation

with copies of essential documentation relevant to the support or defense of the matter being mediated.

24.2.2 The parties shall not be required to mediate for a period greater than ninety-one

calendar days unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the parties. The parties shall share equally any administrative costs and fees of such proceedings, but shall each be responsible for their own expenses otherwise incurred.

24.2.3 In the event that the statute of limitations would run during the required mediation

period, either party may institute litigation so as to avoid the running of such statute upon the condition that such party immediately seek a stay of such litigation pending the conclusion of the mediation period.

24.2.4 During the course of mediation, any party to the mediation may apply for

injunctive relief from any court of competent jurisdiction until the mediation period expires or the dispute is otherwise resolved.

24.2.5 The Owner, the Professional, the Builder, and any other parties involved in any

way in the design or construction of the Project are bound, each to each other, by this requirement to mediate prior to commencement of any litigation or administrative action, provided that they have signed the Contract For Construction or an agreement that incorporates the Contract For Construction by reference or signed any other agreement which binds them to mediate. Each such party agrees that it may be joined as an additional party to a mediation involving other parties under any such agreement. In the case where more than one mediation is begun under any such agreement and any party contends that the mediations are substantially related, the mediations may be conducted by the mediator selected in the first mediation which was commenced.

24.2.6 The mediation shall be conducted in Alachua County, Florida, unless agreed

otherwise by the parties. 24.3 Conflicting Dispute Resolution Provisions. Neither party to the Contract for

Construction shall enter into any contract with regard to the Project which directly or indirectly gives the right to resolve any dispute with, involving, or affecting the other to any other person or legal entity which is in conflict with the dispute resolution procedures required by this Article.

24.4 Arbitration Preclusion. In case of a dispute relating to the Project, or arising out of the

Contract for Construction, no party to the Contract for Construction shall be required to participate in or be bound by, any arbitration proceedings.

GTC-42 June 19, 2006

24.5 Performance During Dispute Resolution. The Owner and the Builder agree that pending the resolution of any dispute, controversy, or question, the Owner and the Builder shall each continue to perform their respective obligations without interruption or delay, and the Builder shall not stop or delay the performance of the Work.

24.6 Litigation/Administrative Action. Disputes, claims, questions or disagreements

involving monetary claims of $200,000.00 or less shall be conducted pursuant to, and under, the Administrative Procedures Act, Chapter 120 Florida Statutes. All other claims, disputes and other matters shall be determined under the judiciary system of the State of Florida.

ARTICLE 25 DAMAGES AND REMEDIES

25.1 Builder’s Repair. The Builder shall, at its expense, promptly correct, repair, or replace

all goods, products, materials, systems, labor and services which do not comply with the warranties and guarantees set forth in the Contract for Construction, or any other applicable warranty or guarantee.

25.2 Builder’s Reimbursement. The Builder shall promptly reimburse the Owner for any

expenses or damages incurred by the Owner as a result of (i) the Builder 's failure to substantially perform in accordance with the terms of the Contract for Construction; (ii) deficiencies or conflicts in the Construction Documents attributable to the Builder or of which the Builder was or should have been aware; (iii) breach of the warranties and guarantees set forth in the Contract for Construction or any other applicable warranty or guarantee; or (iv) other acts or omissions of the Builder.

25.3 General Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Builder shall secure,

defend, protect, hold harmless, and indemnify the Owner and the Owner’s Related Parties from and against any and all liability, loss, claims, demands, suits, costs, fees and expenses (including actual fees and expenses of attorneys, expert witnesses, and other consultants), by whomsoever brought or alleged, and regardless of the legal theories upon which premised, including, but not limited to, those actually or allegedly arising out of bodily injury to, or sickness or death of, any person, or property damage or destruction (including loss of use), which may be imposed upon, incurred by or asserted against the Owner allegedly or actually arising out of or resulting from the Builder’s services, including without limitation any breach of contract or negligent act or omission (i) of the Builder; or (ii) of the Builder’s subcontractors or suppliers, or (iii) of the agents, employees or servants of the Builder or its subcontractors or suppliers.

25.4 Intellectual Property Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Builder

shall defend, protect, hold harmless, and indemnify the Owner and Owner’s Related Parties from and against any and all liability, loss, claims, demands, suits, costs, fees and expenses (including actual fees and expenses of attorneys, expert witnesses, and other consultants), by whomsoever brought or alleged, for infringement of patent rights, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights, except with respect to designs, processes or products of a particular manufacturer expressly required by the Owner or Professional(s) in writing. If the Builder has reason to believe the use of a required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Builder shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly given to the Owner.

GTC-43 June 19, 2006

25.5 Non-Exclusivity Of Owner’s Remedies. The Owner's selection of one or more

remedies for breach of the Contract for Construction contained herein shall not limit the Owner's right to invoke any other remedy available to the Owner under the Contract for Construction or by law.

25.6 Waiver Of Damages. The Builder shall not be entitled to, and hereby waives any

monetary claims for or damages arising from or related to, lost profits, lost business opportunities, unabsorbed overhead or any indirect consequential damages.

ARTICLE 26 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

26.1 Integration. The Contract For Construction represents the entire and integrated

agreement between the Owner and the Builder, and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral, for the Project. The Contract for Construction may be amended only by written instruments signed by both the Owner and the Builder.

26.2 Severability. If any provision of the Contract For Construction, or the application

thereof, is determined to be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of that provision and all other provisions shall remain valid and enforceable.

26.3 Waiver. No provision of the Contract For Construction may be waived except by written

agreement of the parties. A waiver of any provision on one occasion shall not be deemed a waiver of that provision on any subsequent occasion, unless specifically stated in writing. A waiver of any provision shall not affect or alter the remaining provisions of the Contract For Construction.

26.4 Strict Compliance. No failure of the Owner to insist upon strict compliance by the

Builder with any provision of the Contract For Construction shall operate to release, discharge, modify, change or affect any of the Builder’s obligations.

26.5 Third-Party Beneficiaries. The Contract For Construction shall inure solely to the

benefit of the parties hereto and their successors and assigns, and, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract for Construction, nothing contained in the Contract for Construction is intended to or shall create a contractual relationship with, or any rights or cause of action in favor of, any third party against either the Owner or the Builder.

26.6 Assignment of Anti-Trust Claims. In consideration for the Contract for Construction,

the Builder hereby conveys, sells, assigns and transfers to the Owner all of its right, title and interest in and to any and all causes of action it may now have or may hereafter acquire under the antitrust laws of the United States and the Sate of Florida for price fixing, relating to the goods or services purchased or acquired by the Owner under the Contract for Construction.

26.7 Drug Free Workplace. If required pursuant to 440.102(15), Florida Statutes, Builder

shall implement, and cause its applicable subcontractors to implement, a drug-free workplace program.

GTC-44 June 19, 2006

26.8 Survival. All provisions of the Contract For Construction which contain continuing

obligations shall survive its expiration or termination. 26.9 Independent Contractor. Builder is an independent contractor to Owner.

GTC-45 June 19, 2006

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00400 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE


SECTION 00400 - STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE To the best of my knowledge the Plans and Specifications comply with the applicable minimum building codes and the applicable fire-safety standards as determined by the local authority in accordance with this section and 633 Florida Statutes. END OF SECTION 00400

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00810 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPATION


SECTION 00810 – MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPATION The University of Florida is an equal opportunity institution and, as such, encourages the use of Minority Business Enterprises (MBEs) in the provision of construction-related services. MBEs should have a fair and equal opportunity to compete for dollars spent by the University of Florida to procure construction-related services. Competition ensures that prices are competitive and a broad vendor base is available. MBE-related information shall be sent to the Division of Small Business and Vendor Diversity Relations, PO Box 115250, Elmore Hall, Gainesville, Florida 32611, Attn: Ms. Faylene Welcome. Please do not include the information with any bid documents.

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00830 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM


SECTION 00830 - EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the General Terms and Conditions and other sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.2 Equal Opportunity Statement – The University of Florida has established equal opportunity

practices which conform to both the spirit and the letter of all laws against discrimination and prohibits discrimination based on race, creed, color, sex, age, national origin, marital status or religion. The Builder, therefore, agrees to the following: A. The provisions or Executive Order 11246, September 24, 1966, and the rules,

regulations, and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor are applicable. B. If the Builder expects to be paid $10,000 or more during the first 12 months of the

agreement, a complete certificate of non-segregated facilities shall be provided. See attached Certification Form.

C. If the Builder expects to be paid $50,000 or more during the first 12 months of the

agreement and employs more than 50 people, standard form 100 (EEOO-1) must be filed prior to March 1 of each year. Examples and Instructions can be found at: http://www.eeoc.gov/eeo1survey/index.html

D. If the Builder expects to be paid $50,000 or more during the first 12 months and

employs more than 50 people, a written program for affirmative action compliance must be maintained by the Builder, subject to review upon request by the University.

http://www.eeoc.gov/eeo1survey/index.html

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00830 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM


CERTIFICATE OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES We, (Company) certify that we do not and will not maintain or provide for our employees any segregated facilities at any of our establishments, and that we do not and will not permit our employees to perform their services at any location, under our control, where segregated facilities are maintained. We understand and agree that breach of this certification is a violation of Equal Opportunity clause required by Executive Order 11246, amended. As used in this certification, the term “segregated facilities” means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, creed, color, or national origin, because of habit, local custom or otherwise. We further agree that (except where we have obtained identical certifications from proposed Subcontractors for specific time periods) we will obtain identical certifications from proposed Subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000.00 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause; that we will retain such certifications in our files; and that we will forward the following notice to such proposed Subcontractors (except where the proposed Subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods). NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT FOR CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES. A certification of Non-segregated facilities as required by the 9 May 1967 order on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor (32 Fed. Reg. 7439, 19 May 1967), must be submitted from the provisions either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e. quarterly, semi-annually or annually). NOTE: Whoever knowingly and willfully makes any false, fictitious or fraudulent representation may be liable to criminal prosecution under 18 U.S.C.1001. (NAME OF COMPANY) By: Date: Title:

END OF SECTION 00830

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00842 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 00842 - SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and other Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

B. Refer to UF General Terms and Conditions for information relating to the Trench

Safety Act.

1.2 OSHA REGULATIONS:

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that all OSHA regulations applying to this job are adhered to at all times.

1.3 FLORIDA RIGHT-TO-KNOW LAW:

A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of Chapter 442, Florida Statutes, as applicable to the work required to fulfill the Contractor's obligations under this contract. These requirements include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. That if the work requires the direct purchase of any item designated as a

toxic substance, the manufacturer, importer, or distributer of said toxic substance shall prepare and provide the purchaser (Contractor) with a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) that is current, accurate, and complete.

2. That every employer (Contractor) who manufactures, produces, uses,

applies, or stores toxic substances in the workplace shall in a place where notices are normally posted post a notice informing employees of their rights under this statute.

3. That every employer (Contractor) who manufactures, produces, uses, or

applies toxic substances in the workplace shall maintain an MSDS for each product which is present in such workplace.

4. That an independent contractor (Contractor) or subcontractor working in

the workplace of another employer (Owner) may request in writing and shall have the right to examine the MSDS for the toxic substances to which he/she or his/her employees, are, have been, or may be exposed.

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00842 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


1.3 FLORIDA RIGHT-TO-KNOW LAW - Continued:

A toxic substance is defined as any chemical substance or mixture in gaseous, liquid or solid state, if such substance appears on the "Florida Substance List" promulgated by the Department of Labor and Employment Security; is manufactured, produced, used, applied or stored in the workplace; and causes a significant risk to safety or health during, or as a proximate result of, any customary or reasonably foreseeable handling or use.

B. Any questions regarding the above requirements should be directed to:

Department of Labor and Employment Security, Bureau of Industrial Safety and Health, Toxic Waste Information Center, 2551 Executive Center Circle West, Tallahassee, FL 32301-5014, Telephone: 1-800-367-4378.

C. The MSDS must be maintained by the user agency and must include the following

information:

1. The Chemical name and the common name of the toxic substance. 2. The hazards or other risks in the use of the toxic substance, including:

a. The potential for fire, explosion, corrosion, and reactivity. b. The known acute and chronic health effects of risks from exposure,

including the medical conditions which are generally recognized as being aggravated by exposure to the toxic substance;

c. The primary routes of entry and symptoms of overexposure.

3. The proper precautions, handling practices, necessary personal protective equipment, and other safety precautions in the use of or exposure to the toxic substances, including appropriate emergency treatment in case of overexposure.

4. The emergency procedure for spills, fire, disposal, and first aid. 5. A description in lay terms of the known specific potential health risks posed

by the toxic substance intended to alert any person reading this information.

6. The year and month, if available, that the information was compiled and the

name, address, and emergency telephone number of the manufacturer responsible for preparing the information.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00902 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES


SECTION 00902 - PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES


Documents affecting the work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and other Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.2 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES:

A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list by the Department of Management Services, State of Florida, may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services, including construction, repairs, or leases and may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant for the University of Florida for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. A "person" or "affiliate" includes any natural person or any entity, including predecessor or successor entities or an entity under the control of any natural person who is active in its management and who has been convicted of a public entity crime (Section 287.133, Florida Statutes).


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00903 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida ASBESTOS POLICY STATEMENT


SECTION 00903 - ASBESTOS POLICY STATEMENT


Documents affecting the work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and other Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.2 NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS IN UNIVERSITY BUILDINGS:

Asbestos containing materials (ACM) can be found in almost any building in the United States more than 10 years old. The University of Florida is no exception. The types of asbestos most commonly found are pipe and boiler insulation, fireproofing, hard panels known as "Transite", floor tile, and spray or trowel-applied ceiling finishes. ACM is generally not hazardous if left undisturbed. The University has implemented an Asbestos Program to assure safe management and removal of ACM. Contractors, consultants, and other vendors providing service to the University may encounter ACM and must, therefore, comply with the following instructions: A. Avoid disturbing suspected ACM. Exercise caution and watch for possible ACM. B. If it is necessary to disturb ACM, first notify the appropriate Division Asbestos

Representative listed in this notice, or the University of Florida Asbestos Coordinator, before proceeding with your work. You shall take whatever precautions are necessary to protect human health and the environment, and comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws pertaining to asbestos.

C. If you require additional information on possible locations of ACM in a particular

building, contact the Asbestos Representative from the Division for which you are working.

Division Asbestos Representative Phone #

Physical Plant Associate Director, Physical Plant 352/294-0616 Environmental Health & Safety Asbestos Program Manager 352/392-3393 Health Center Director, Health Center Physical Plant 352/392-4417 Housing Maintenance Superintendent 352/392-2178 Reitz Union Maintenance Superintendent 352/392-1614 IFAS Engineer, Facilities Operations 352/392-6488

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 00903 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida ASBESTOS POLICY STATEMENT


D. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT:

The University of Florida received notice that GPAC, Inc., 7854 Browning Road, P.O. Box 662, Pennsauken, NJ 08109, is the owner of U.S. Patent No. 4,604,111 dated August 5, 1986 for Particulate Contamination Control Method and Filtration Device. The Patent Abstract states:

A negative pressure method and apparatus for protection from airborne asbestos and other particulate contamination is disclosed, including an enclosure with doorways and decontamination chambers with an air intake through the decontamination chambers with at least one filtration unit flow connected with the enclosure, with a blower to pull air into the filtration unit and dispelling the filtered air to the atmosphere. A high volume air flow intake is maintained with a significant air pressure in the enclosure. A filtration device is provided with multiple entrance ports provided with multiple entrance through the body of the room together with individual entrance ports to receive the discharge from separate vacuum cleaners.

Bidders are responsible for having permission to use patented processes or products and shall indemnify and defend the University of Florida, Board of Regents, and the State of Florida against claims of patent infringement and to pay damages awarded and costs, including attorneys' fees, incurred by or on behalf of the University of Florida, Board of Regents, and/or State of Florida.

1.3 ASBESTOS POLICY STATEMENT COMPLIANCE AGREEMENT:

Please sign the following agreement form and return it to the University of Florida, Purchasing Division. (This form is not required to accompany the Bid Proposal, but is required prior to, and as a condition for, Bid Award.): I have read, understand, and agree to abide by the above policy.

(Date)

(Notary Public)

(Commission)

(Name of Bidder)

(Signature)

(Title) END OF SECTION 00903

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01010 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SUMMARY OF THE WORK


SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK


A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and other Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED:

A. The project is located within the historic district of an existing campus and includes a building on the National Historic Registry. Early Release Package #1 consists of the following Design Assist Scopes:

1. Terra Cotta Rehabilitation 2. New Terra Cotta 3. Historic Window Replacement 4. Fire Sprinkler Design

B. The work consists of all items as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in the

Project Manual and those items of construction not indicated but normal and necessary and usual in the construction industry for construction of a building project.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01014 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida BUILDER'S USE OF THE PREMISES


SECTION 01014 - BUILDER'S USE OF THE PREMISES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include other elements of the Contract for Construction, including the Owner/Builder Agreement or Owner/Design-Builder Agreement, the General Terms & Conditions, other sections of the Division 0 and Division 1 non-technical specifications, and the technical plans and specifications.

B. Refer to section 01016 for information regarding utility outages and dig permits.

C. Refer to section 01310 for requirements regarding the coordination of work with the

University of Florida Schedule. D. Refer to section 01500 for requirements related to Temporary Facilities & Controls.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section applies to situations in which the Builder or his representatives including, but not necessarily limited to, suppliers, subcontractors, employees, and field engineers, enter upon the Owner's property.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Promptly upon award of the Contract, notify all pertinent personnel regarding requirements of this Section.

B. Require that all personnel who will enter upon the University's property certify their

awareness of and familiarity with the requirements of this Section. C. Builder shall strictly enforce the University’s Tobacco Free policy.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES

A. See section 01500 for information on the maintenance of safe and accessible paths of travel in and around the job site.

B. Builder’s Vehicles:

1. Require Builder's vehicles, vehicles belonging to employees of the Builder, and

all other vehicles entering upon the Owner's property in performance of the Work of the Contract, to use only agreed upon Access Route.



2. All vehicles parked on campus (including construction sites) must have a valid parking permit issued through Transportation and Parking Services in accordance with University of Florida Police Department (UFPD) requirements. Permits – both for offsite and approved onsite parking – shall be requested through the University Project Manager.

3. Within the University approved fenced-in construction site area, the Builder shall

manage all site use, including parking by construction staff and employees (if approved). Do not permit vehicles to park on any street or other area of the Owner's property except in areas designated by the University.

4. Outside the designated construction site area, all University regulations

regarding parking and accommodations for pedestrian use shall be strictly enforced.

5. Exceptions for temporary parking for construction delivery and construction

access on curb side, walkways, vehicular parking, roadways and service drives that restricts or impedes normal traffic flow or use must be obtained from UF Transportation & Parking Services through the University Project Manager. This exception is granted only for construction vehicles, not for private passenger vehicles. Any temporary use of pedestrian pathways that exceeds 24 hours duration will require provision for equal alternate pathways around the impediments and UFPD review. In addition, any temporary use of the site (exceeding 24 hours duration) that impedes building occupant egress must be reviewed by UF Environmental Health & Safety (EH&S).

6. The University Project Managers shall not seek waivers of any sort for ticketed

and towed vehicles in violation of the University parking regulations. Knowledge of the University Parking Regulations is the personal responsibility every individual who commutes to and works on campus.

7. Provide adequate protection for curbs and sidewalks over which trucks and

equipment must pass to reach the job site. 1.5 INSPECTIONS and TESTS

A. Physical Plant Division (PPD) inspections shall be requested 48 hours in advance through PPD Operations Engineering. The inspection request form and supporting checklists can be found on the “Forms & Standards” page of the Facilities Planning & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu). Inspection checklists shall be tailored by the Owner and Builder to the specific requirements of the project.

B. Environmental Health & Safety (EH&S) inspections shall be requested 24 hours in

advance. Also see section 01060.




C. Office of Information Technology (OIT): Contact Telecommunications and Infrastructure (TNI) 24-48 hours in advance to request inspections for all telecom, cabling, and network infrastructure work. The inspection checklist – with notification timeframes and contact information – can be found on the “Forms & Standards” page of the Facilities Planning & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu).

D. HealthNet: For Health Science Center projects only, contact HealthNet 24-48 hours in advance to request inspections for all telecom, cabling, and network infrastructure work. The inspection checklist – with notification timeframes and contact information – can be found on the “Forms & Standards” page of the Planning Design & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu).

E. Office of Academic Technology (OAT): Where applicable, contact OAT 48 hours or more in advance to request inspections for all work related to classroom audio/visual systems. The inspection checklist – with notification timeframes and contact information – can be found on the “Forms & Standards” page of the Facilities Planning & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu).

F. University of Florida Police Department (UPD): UPD must verify construction

fencing, exterior lighting, landscaping, and other items during construction and closeout. The UPD checklist – with notification timeframes and contact information – can be found on the “Forms & Standards” page of the Facilities Planning & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu).

G. State Fire Marshal inspections – see section 01060.

H. State Elevator Inspector inspections – see technical specification 14200.

I. Architect / Engineer inspections – Architect / Engineer inspections – see UF Design

and Commissioning Services Guide.

J. Tests

1. The Builder shall notify PPD and EH&S of all scheduled tests at least 48 hours in advance.

2. Properly completed test reports shall be provided at the conclusion of each test. It is the responsibility of the Builder to maintain such reports through Final Completion, at which point they shall be submitted with other closeout materials, such as Operation & Maintenance manuals.

1.6 SECURITY

A. Restrict the access of all persons entering upon the Owner's property in connection with the Work to the access route and to the actual site of the Work.

B. Restrict activities of employees to authorized areas. Employees shall not be allowed

to mingle in student or public areas.







C. The Builder shall at all times guard against damage or loss to the property of the University or other vendors or contractors and shall be held responsible for replacing or repairing any such loss or damage. The University may withhold payment or make such deductions as deemed necessary to insure reimbursement or replacement for loss or damaged property through negligence of the successful bidder or his agents. Replace any trees, shrubs, lawns, or plantings damaged by Builder or its subcontractors or vendors during work of this project within two (2) weeks of occurrence. Grassed areas generally have irrigation systems below grade; verify location of these systems and all underground utilities in work or staging areas prior to start of construction. Repair utilities damaged by work of this project.

D. The Builder shall provide identification tags with photos for all personnel working on

the site and shall require continuous use (wearing) of same at all times.

1.7 UNIVERSITY of FLORIDA POLICE DEPARTMENT (UFPD) REQUIREMENTS

The following requirements are to be met by Builders and their subcontractors and vendors while engaged in construction projects at the University of Florida. Any construction site located on the University of Florida campus comes under the jurisdiction of the UFPD. Any incident requiring police service should be reported to the UFPD immediately (352-392-1111).

A. All employers are prohibited from allowing employees to work on campus who have

been convicted of violent crimes. B. Construction employers are required to take adequate measures to ensure that the

employees they send to work on campus are not wanted for criminal offenses. C. All Builders who employ Work Release Program employees shall be listed with the

UFPD. D. All Builders are to provide the UFPD with a list of the names and telephone numbers

of supervisors in charge of construction at the site. E. Construction firms and employees are to park their business and personal vehicles

in authorized areas only. F. Parking permits are required for all personal and business vehicles. G. When Builders are fencing allotted compounds the responsible person should

contact the UFPD for special requirements prior to fencing completion. See Section 01500 for specific requirements related to signage and fencing.

H. Employees are not permitted to enter University buildings unless it is directly related

to their job duties and must remain on job sites. I. Builders and employees are to obey all laws as well as rules of the University of

Florida when they are on University property.



J. Students, Faculty, and Staff of the University of Florida are not to be disturbed or in any way disrupted in their lawful pursuits. Construction employees are to refrain from any unsavory or unwanted comments towards students, particularly female students.

K. Builders and employees are requested to secure all property as much as feasible to

reduce theft or damage to equipment or property. Builders are expected to work with the UFPD and participate in Crime Prevention efforts.

L. Each Builder is to advise the UFPD if they cater food to be delivered to the

construction site for employees. A copy of the contract shall be provided to the UFPD.

M. Construction companies are required to submit the names and dates of birth of all

employees – including temporary “day laborers” – to the University of Florida Police Department (c/o Special Events Coordinator), Building 27, UFPD, Museum Road, Gainesville, FL 32611 (fax 352-392-0539). Periodic updates are required as employees are employed or terminated.

1.8 WORK HOURS

A. Regular work hours shall be between 7:00 AM and 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

B. Work outside these hours must be requested in writing and approved by the Owner.

1.9 HOME FOOTBALL GAME WEEKENDS

A. Approximately 100,000 people converge upon the campus on each of 6-7 Fall weekends for Gator football games. To safeguard both the public and the Work, jobsites on campus shall be secured, left clean, and free of safety hazards by 4:00 PM Friday on such weekends, with no work taking place on or around the site until Monday morning.

B. Likewise, remove all vehicles parked at the paved remote lot near the 34th Street

Hilton by 4:00 PM Friday on such weekends and do not permit parking there again until Monday morning.

C. See www.gatorzone.com for the football game schedule and incorporate these dates

into the construction schedule. D. The Builder may request special exceptions to this policy with written justification at

least one week in advance, but the Owner is under no obligation to approve such requests.

http://www.gatorzone.com/



1.10 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Prior to commencing Work at the site, the Builder shall attend a pre-construction conference with the University Project Manager, the Design Professional(s), other UF officials, and external agency representatives, if applicable (such the District Engineer on a Federally-funded project).

B. Builder attendees shall include all field staff (project manager, superintendent(s),

project engineer(s), and clerical assistants), plus major trade subcontractors as directed by the University Project Manager.

C. The parties will discuss the administrative, logistic, fiscal, and procedural

requirements for the Work, and for work in general at the University of Florida. D. The template agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the University Project

Manager, who shall also arrange for attendance by other UF officials and outside agencies, if any. The Builder shall record and distribute minutes.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01016 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida UTILITY OUTAGES AND DIG PERMITS


SECTION 01016 - UTILITY OUTAGES AND DIG PERMITS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS


B. Refer to Section 01310, Construction Schedules for related requirements regarding

the coordination of utility outages with the University of Florida Schedule. 1.2 UTILITIES OUTAGES

C. Planned utility outages are occasionally required for repairs, maintenance or construction. In order to avoid unexpected inconveniences, property damage, safety hazards, or loss of information or research, the Physical Plant Division (PPD) has instituted a utility outage notification system.

D. When the Work requires an outage, the Builder shall submit – at least seven (7)

work days in advance – a written request to PPD via the University Project Manager on an Owner-furnished form. Outages shall not proceed until authorized by PPD.

E. Utility outages will be performed by PPD Systems personnel, at no cost to the

Builder. The project will pay the applicable costs. However, the costs associated with an outage that becomes necessary to correct deficient work performed during a previous outage will be back-charged to the Builder. Contact PPD Operations Engineering (Telephone: 392-5050) as necessary to determine these costs.

F. Unplanned utility outages occur on occasion as the unwelcome result of repair,

maintenance, or construction activities. Report all unplanned utility outages immediately to the PPD Work Management Center (Telephone: 392-1121) and to the University Project Manager.

G. Advance notification of between 14 and 30 calendar days must be provided to the

Health Science Center, Department of Housing, and IFAS for significant outages effecting facilities operated by those entities.

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01016 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida UTILITY OUTAGES AND DIG PERMITS


1.3 DIG PERMITS

A. All trenching, excavation, digging operations, or other penetration of the ground within the confines of the University campus or in any area for which the University has responsibility, requires the Builder to obtain a Dig Permit, PPD Form 611, which can be retrieved from the PPD website at www.ppd.ufl.edu.

B. The person, Builder, agency, or organization that will be performing the trenching,

excavation, digging, or other ground-penetrating activity is responsible for requesting and obtaining permission to perform that activity.

C. All Dig Permits shall be applied for 72 hours prior to the start of any work that penetrates the ground. Dig Permit applications shall be completed at PPD, Building 702.

D. Sunshine State One-Call (800-432-4770) shall be utilized for utilities owned by

others, including BellSouth, Cox Cable, and Gainesville Regional Utilities (GRU).


http://www.ppd.ufl.edu/

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01060 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 01060 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS


1.2 BUILDING CODE ENFORCEMENT PROGRAM

A. Florida statutes (240.209 and 553.80(6) F.S.) and associated regulations (Rule 6C-14020(2) F.A.C.) assign responsibility to the State University System for building code enforcement during building construction and renovation at State universities. At the University of Florida, the Environmental Health and Safety Division (EH&S) has been assigned the responsibility to implement and administer the Building Code Permit and Inspection Program. Program compliance requires that construction plans and specifications be submitted for review by the Building Code Administrator (EH&S) and that construction not begin on the project until a building permit has been issued.

B. A more complete description of the University of Florida's Building Code

Enforcement Program may be obtained from the University's Building Code Administrator.

EH&S Building Code Enforcement Building 179, 916 Newell Drive, P.O. Box 112190, Gainesville, FL, 32611-2200 Phone: (352) 392-1591; Fax (352) 392-3647 Internet: www.ehs.ufl.edu

C. RESPONSIBILITIES

1. The Builder shall apply to the UF Division of Environmental Health & Safety for

a building permit. At the time of application for a permit, the Builder shall provide two sets of signed and sealed construction documents and specifications, a list of all subcontractors with appropriate license numbers, and the "letter of code compliance" indicating the plans have been reviewed by EH&S and all outstanding items have been resolved. If a "letter of code compliance" has not been issued by EH&S, two copies of the final bid construction documents and specifications must accompany the application. A building permit will be issued after these items have been reviewed and approved by the Building Code Administrator. One of the submitted sets of plans and specifications will be returned with the building permit and shall be stamped by EH&S stating "Reviewed for Code Compliance." This set of documents shall be kept on site for use by the inspectors.

http://www.ehs.ufl.edu/



2. When the Builder believes the project is complete, the Builder shall request that a certificate of completion or certificate of occupancy be issued.

1.3 STATE FIRE MARSHAL (SFM) INSPECTIONS

A. In keeping State law (F.S. 633.085), the Division of State Fire Marshal will inspect UF projects during construction, renovation, or alteration – and prior to occupancy – to ascertain compliance with the uniform fire-safety standards.

B. Underground Fire Main Visit. If applicable, this site visit is required before

backfilling the open trench and covering the supply piping. The inspector will verify the underground installation is in compliance and witness the required pressure and flush test(s). Requests for these inspections go directly from the Builder to the onsite SFM inspector at least two work days prior to the desired date of inspection.

C. Most projects will require two major SFM inspections, each of which shall be

requested by the Builder at least two weeks prior to the desired date of inspection. The Builder shall make such request to the University Project Manager, who coordinates with EH&S to schedule the SFM inspections.

D. The first inspection shall occur prior to the placement of any hard surface finishes,

such as drywall, plaster, or hard ceilings, which would obscure any fire sprinkler piping and related products.

E. A final inspection is required prior to building occupancy. In order for a final

inspection to occur the following items must be complete:

1. The fire alarm system is completely installed, tested, tagged, and certified in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements.

2. The fire sprinkler system is complete and has been hydrostatically tested,

flushed and tagged in accordance with NFPA 13. 3. The fire pump installation is complete and the pump has been certified in

accordance with NFPA 20 requirements. 4. All emergency and exit lights have been installed and tested. 5. All fire doors, required exit hardware, magnetic door locks, and latching

hardware has been installed and is in proper working order. 6. All required emergency signage shall be installed. 7. All portable fire extinguishers, pre-engineered fire suppression systems, and

kitchen hoods have been installed and inspected by the installing subcontractor.

F. See the State Fire Marshal Services Guide under “Forms & Standards” on the

Facilities Planning & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu) for more information.




1.4 FLORIDA PRODUCT APPROVAL

A. As required by Florida Statutes, the Builder shall provide information on certain structural and building envelope products and components. See “Florida Product Approval Info Sheet” on the “Forms” page of the EH&S Building Code Enforcement website (www.ehs.ufl.edu/buildcode).


http://www.ehs.ufl.edu/buildcode

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01310 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES


SECTION 01310 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS


B. Refer to Section 01016, Utility Outages, for related requirements regarding the pre-

planning of utility outages. C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340, Submittals and Substitutions.


A. Employ, if necessary, a scheduler who is thoroughly trained and experienced in compiling construction schedules, and in preparing and issuing periodic reports as required.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONSTRUCTION ANALYSIS

A. Graphically show by bar chart the order and interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the Work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished, as planned by the Builder in coordination with all subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram.

B. Highlight the “critical path” through the schedule to illustrate those inter-dependent

activities that cannot be delayed without impacting the overall completion time.

C. Builder shall coordinate the Work with the University of Florida schedule. The Work shall be scheduled and carried out such that the normal operations of the University are given first priority. This applies particularly to outages of utilities and restrictions of access. The University may require such construction operations to be executed outside of normal working hours and by overtime, weekend, and holiday working. It shall be the Builder's responsibility to provide for this in the Cost of Work.

D. See Section 01014 for information on home football game restrictions, and account

for same in the construction schedule.

E. Incorporate commissioning requirements and milestones.

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01310 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES


F. Provide amplifying information as needed, such as reports on “float,” or as requested by the Owner or Professional.

G. Project-specific schedule requirements: NONE


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01340 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


SECTION 01340 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for Project submittals.

B. Electronic Construction Document Files: At the start of construction, the Architect will provide the Builder with electronic document files for use during the course of this Project as follows:

1. In accordance with the BIM Execution Plan documents will be released by the

Architect to the Builder.

a. All subcontractor requests for electronic files or documents for this Project shall be directed to the Builder.

b. Any required updates to the electronic files shall be the responsibility of Builder and shall not be provided by the Architect, its consultants, and/or the Owner.

c. Before the release of the electronic Project files to the Builder by the Architect, Builder shall sign and submit a Revit waiver form for the Project.

2. Electronic drawings provided by the Architect to the Builder shall be in Revit 2013

format.

1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Refer to the General Terms and Conditions for submittal requirements.

B. Builder shall check shop drawings, samples, and other submittals and submit them to the Architect with a letter of transmittal giving his approval, comments, and suggestions. Each transmittal shall include the following information:

1. Date Submitted. 2. Project title and number. 3. Subcontractor's name and address. 4. Identification by Specification Section and quantity submitted for each submittal

including name of subcontractors, manufacturer, or supplier. 5. Notification of deviations from the Contract Documents for each submittal. 6. Builder's written approval marked on each submittal. If Builder’s submittals are

not stamped and reviewed by the Builder before submitting for review, submittals will be sent back to the Builder.



7. If there is more than one building in the Project, shop drawings are to be submitted and packaged for each building and submitted in packages for each separate building.

a. Shop drawings not submitted in this fashion are subject to being rejected

and returned to the Builder unreviewed, and may cause Project delays.

C. Builder shall prepare, review, and stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness or within the specified time periods and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the Work of another subcontractor, submittals required by these Contract Documents or subsequently required by modifications.

D. Builder and Architect shall review and take action on submittals with reasonable promptness, so as to cause no delay in the progress.

1. A reasonable period of time for review of and action taken on submittals shall be

as specified herein, but in no case shall it be more than 14 calendar days from the time it is received by the Architect until the time the submittal is marked and forwarded or returned.

2. Subcontractors shall allow sufficient mailing and handling time for submittals.

E. Maximum Review of the Same Submittal: The same submittal will only be reviewed a maximum of two (2) times.

1. If the same submittal is not correct within the two (2) submittal limit for the same

item, Builder will be charged for the additional reviews required. 2. Architect’s additional time will be on an hourly basis, which amount will be

deducted from Builder’s Contract Sum by Change Order.

F. Identification of Submittals: Submittals, including re-submittals, shall be numbered with a Submittal Number.

1. Submittal Number shall consist of the applicable Specification Section number

followed by a suffix number in consecutive order starting with 001. Additional submittals for the same specification section are to be numbered consecutively 002, 003, etc.

2. The form of Submittals Numbers shall be as follows: ## ## ## - ### (example: 09900-001). Re-submittal Submittal Numbers shall consist of the previously used Submittal Number plus an alphanumeric suffix for the re-submittal. (Example: 09900 – 001R1). R1 indicates the first re-submittal, R2 indicates the second re-submittal, etc.

G. LEED Submittals: Refer to Section 01352 for specific submittal requirements.

1. As may be necessary to determine compliance with indicated LEED objectives and credits, Builder shall provide complete submittals in a timely manner for all work of this Project.

2. LEED submittals may be required in advance of other submittals to ensure that the Project will achieve the indicated credits for certification. Builder shall provide such information as indicated within the Specifications and as requested by the Architect for LEED compliance requirements.



1.3 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. All submittals shall be uploaded to the Project Sharepoint site.

2. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures, and other data which are prepared by Builder or subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

a. Advertising brochures will not be accepted as shop drawings. b. Erection and setting drawings as referred to in these Specifications will be

considered as shop drawings and shall be submitted along with detailed shop drawings.

c. Where schedules are required to indicate locations, they shall be submitted as part of the shop drawing package for that item.

d. Shop drawings and schedules shall repeat the identification shown on the Contract Drawings.

3. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,

instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by subcontractor to illustrate a material, product, or system for some portion of the Work.

a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials. b. Show dimensions and clearance required. c. Show performance and characteristics and capacities. d. Show wiring diagrams and controls. e. Note variances from the Contract Documents including manufacturer's

recommended changes to sequencing and to piping and control diagrams.

4. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Builder, Subcontractor, submittal name, and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. Show Builder's executed review and approval marking and provide space for Architect's "Action" marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Builder will be returned "without action," which does not mean approval.

5. By approving and submitting shop drawings, Builder thereby represents that he has determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents before submitting to the Architect.

6. Builder shall make corrections required by Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of shop drawings until approved. Builder shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Architect on previous submissions.



7. Architect will review shop drawings only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents.

a. Architect's review of a separate item shall not indicate review of an assembly in which the item functions.

8. Architect's review of shop drawings shall not relieve Builder of responsibility for

any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Builder has specifically informed the Architect, in writing, of such deviation at the time to submission, requesting approval of such deviation, and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation.

a. Architect’s review or actions taken regarding shop drawings shall not

relieve the Builder from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings.

9. Notations and remarks added to shop drawings by the Architect are to insure

compliance to Drawings and Specifications and do not imply a requested or approved change to Contract cost.

10. Should deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts be discovered, either before or after the Architect’s review, between shop and Contract Drawings and Specifications, Contract Documents shall govern and be the Documents to comply with.

11. Shop drawings will be marked as follows: Builder shall take the following action

for each respective marking:

a. "REVIEWED AND RELEASED" - Copies will be distributed as indicated under above schedule.

b. "REVIEWED AND RELEASED WITH CORRECTIONS" - Builder may proceed with fabrication, taking into account the necessary corrections. Corrected shop drawings shall be resubmitted before fabrication of this Work is completed. Only shop drawings marked "REVIEWED AND RELEASED" by Architect will be permitted on the project site.

c. "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" - Builder will be required to resubmit shop drawings in their entirety. No fabrication or installation shall be started until shop drawings so marked have been completely revised, resubmitted, and marked by Architect according to preceding Paragraphs 1. or 2.

d. "INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION" - Not enough information has been sent. Builder will be required to resubmit shop drawings in their entirety.

12. Where re-submittal is required, submittal procedures and distribution shall be as specified for submittals.

13. Builder shall maintain at the site one copy of all submittals marked by Architect "REVIEWED AND RELEASED".

a. Shop drawing file may be electronic and accessible by the Builder,

Architect and Owner on the on-site project computer.



b. No installation of equipment, materials, or products is to be incorporated into the Project until shop drawings marked by Architect "REVIEWED AND RELEASED" have been received on the Project.

B. Samples:

1. Builder shall submit to the Architect three (3) samples to illustrate materials or workmanship, colors, and textures, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

a. A complete list of required samples will be submitted to Builder for use as a

check list.

2. By approving and submitting samples, Builder thereby represents that he has determined and verified materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each sample with the requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents before submitting to Architect.

3. Builder shall resubmit the required number of correct or new samples until approved.

a. Builder shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted samples to

revisions other than the changes requested by Architect on previous submissions.

4. Architect will review samples but only for conformance with the design concept of

the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents.

a. Architect's approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions.

5. Architect's action shall not relieve Builder of responsibility for deviations from the

requirements of Contract Documents unless Builder has informed the Architect in writing of the deviation at the time of submission and Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation, nor shall the Architect's action relieve the Builder from its responsibility for errors or omissions in the samples.

6. Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be in triplicate and of adequate size to show function, equality, type, color, range, finish, and texture of material. When requested, full technical information and certified test data shall be supplied.

a. Each sample shall be labeled, bearing material name and quality, the

Builder’s name, date, project name, and other pertinent data.

b. Transportation charges to and from the Architect's office must be prepaid on samples forwarded.

1) Approved samples will be retained by Architect until the Work for

which they were submitted has been accepted.



7. Materials shall not be ordered until approval is received.

a. Materials shall be furnished, equal in every respect to approved samples. b. Where color or shade cannot be guaranteed, the maximum deviation shall

be indicated by the manufacturer. c. Work shall be in accordance with the approved samples.

C. Progress Photographs: Digital photos, as required, to document milestones and/or progress of construction.

D. Work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as additionally required by the manufacturer's instructions, and where a conflict occurs between the Drawings or Specifications and the manufacturer's instructions, the Builder shall request clarification from the Architect before commencing the work and shall follow the interpretation given by Architect.

1.4 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)

A. In compliance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (1910.1200, 08-24-1987) contractors are required to have on the site, MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) for ALL products classified as hazardous that their firm has knowledge that they will be furnishing, using, or storing on the jobsite during the duration of this Project.

B. Provide MSDS data where required, where indicated, and when requested by the Architect.

C. MSDS sheets are not part of the shop drawing review process.

D. The Contractor at completion of the Work shall provide the Owner with the MSDS sheets for the hazardous products used on the Project site during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01352 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida LEED REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 01352 – LEED REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include other elements of the Con-tract for Construction, including the Owner/Builder Agreement or Owner/Design-Builder Agreement, the General Terms & Conditions, other sections of the Divi-sion 0 and Division 1 non-technical specifications, and the technical plans and specifications.

B. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of

each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Seeking high performance, energy-efficient, and sustainable buildings, the Uni-versity of Florida utilizes Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) criteria as developed by the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) for the design and construction of all major construction and renovation projects. Project certifi-cation may be under the categories LEED- BD+C, LEED-EB, or LEED-CI.

B. The LEED program provides a complete framework for assessing building per-

formance and meeting sustainability goals, with a specific focus on strategies for site development, water savings, energy efficiency, material specifications and procurement, and indoor environmental quality.

C. This section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with

certain LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Gold certification based on LEED-NC, Version 3.0 or the LEED-NC Application Guide for Multiple Buildings and On-Campus Building Projects with Version 4.0 substi-tutions indicated.

1. Prerequisites and credits needed to obtain LEED certification depend on

material selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED re-quirements. Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED pre-requisites and credits may be used as one criterion to evaluate substitu-tion requests and comparable product requests.

2. Prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated LEED certifica-tion depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of the Work.

3. Owner shall register the project with, apply for certification to, and pay all registration and certification fees owed to, the USGBC.

4. Owner will administer the LEED certification process.



5. Builder shall assign a representative – preferably a LEED-Accredited Pro-

fessional – to serve as the primary point of contact, “champion,” and co-ordinator of all construction-phase LEED certification efforts by the builder and its subs.

6. Builder shall participate in LEED coordination meetings with the Owner

and design professional(s) monthly during construction, or as needed. 7. Builder shall communicate all LEED-related requirements to potential

subcontractors and bidders as part of the pre-qualification, selection, and procurement process.

8. Builder shall review LEED requirements, milestones, and action items

with its sub-contractors during weekly sub-contractor meetings. 9. Failure to provide timely submittals related to LEED certification may re-

sult in additional retainage being withheld. 10. Builder shall compile, document, calculate, and otherwise complete all

construction-related LEED documentation prior to Owner’s determination of project Final Completion. This includes providing (uploading) electron-ic copies of LEED-related submittals, reports, and other documents via the USGBC website as needed to certify construction-phase credits.

11. Owner will provide LEED training for the Builder and its subs as needed

and requested. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC – www.fscus.org): Non-profit organization de-

voted to encouraging the responsible management of the world’s forests. C. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. www.usgbc.org D. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically har-

vested within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vege-table oils, or wool.

http://www.fscus.org/

http://www.usgbc.org/



E. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If only a frac-tion of a product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional val-ue. Mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and specialty items shall be excluded from this calculation.

F. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a ra-

dius of 500 miles (800 km) from Project site. Manufacturing refers to the final as-sembly of components into the building product that is installed at Project site.

G. Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured ma-

terials made from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles (800 km) from Project site.

H. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituents that have been re-

covered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer).

1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by

households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its in-tended purpose.

2. “Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste

stream during the manufacturing process. Specifically, discarded materi-als from one manufacturing process that are used as constituents in an-other manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

3. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are com-

bined with other constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of the same product are not recycled materials.

4. Recycled content value is determined by multiplying the recycled fraction

of the assembly (by weight) by the cost of assembly. 5. Mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and specialty items shall be excluded

from this calculation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other Specification Sec-tions.

B. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical

to that submitted to comply with other requirements, provide duplicate copies as a separate submittal to verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements.



C. Material Safety Data Sheets: Provide MSDS data where indicated and when re-quested by the Architect.

D. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials

used for Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following categories of items:

1. Fixed/permanent furnishings 2. Plumbing 3. Mechanical 4. Electrical 5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment 6. Wood-based construction materials

E. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 30 days of date estab-

lished for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met:

1. SS Pre-Requisite 1: Erosion and sedimentation control plan. 2. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Waste Management Plan complying

with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 3. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: List of proposed materials with recy-

cled content. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.

4. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: List of proposed regional materials.

Identify each regional material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

5. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: List of proposed regionally manufac-

tured materials and regionally extracted and manufactured materials.

(a) Identify each regionally manufactured material, including its source and cost.

(b) Identify each regionally extracted and manufactured material, in-

cluding its source and cost. 6. Credit MR 6: Identify rapidly renewable material by cost. 7. Credit MR 7: List of proposed certified wood products by cost. Indicate

each product containing certified wood, including its source and cost of certified wood products.

8. Credit EQ 3.1: Indoor Air Quality management plan during construction.

See section 3.3 and Division 15 spec 15005.



9. Credit EQ 3.2: Indoor-Air Quality management plan before occupancy. Air sampling following Substantial Completion is typically by Owner, but Builder shall denote in the project schedule.

F. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit

reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the following:

1. SS Pre-Requisite 1: Provide digital photos of in-place erosion and sedi-

mentation control measures. 2. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Waste management/reduction 3. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Recycled content 4. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Regional materials 5. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Regionally manufactured materials

and regionally extracted and manufactured materials 6. Credit MR 6 and MR 7: Rapidly renewable materials and certified wood

products

G. LEED Documentation Submittals:

1. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Comply with Section 01505. 2. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Product data and certification letter in-

dicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer re-cycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

3. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Product data for regional materials in-

dicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

4. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Product data indicating location of ma-

terial manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include state-ment indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material and for each regionally extracted and manufactured material.

(a) Include statement indicating distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material.

(b) Include statement indicating location of and distance from Project to point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials.



5. Credit MR 6 and MR 7: Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

6. Credit EQ 3 and EQ 3.1:

(a) Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.

(b) Product data for temporary filtration media. (c) Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. (d) Construction Documentation: Provide 18 photographs – six pho-

tographs taken on three different occasions during construction – along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-air-quality management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or in-stalled absorptive materials.

7. Credit EQ 4.1: Product MSDS data for adhesives and sealants used in-

side the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to the current LEED-NC reference guide.

8. Credit EQ 4.2: Product MSDS data for paints and coatings used inside

the weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated ac-cording to the current LEED-NC reference guide.

9. Credit EQ 4.3: Product MSDS data for carpet indicating chemical com-

position and VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to the current LEED reference guide.

10. Credit EQ 4.4: For products containing composite wood or agrifiber

products or wood glues, provide written certification from the subcontrac-tor and/or manufacturer that such products do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.

11. Credit MR 6 and MR 7: Product data and other supporting documenta-

tion for rapidly renewable materials and certified wood products.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Provide building materials with recycled con-tent such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer re-cycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project.

1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by

dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item.

2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by

dividing weight of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item.

3. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical compo-

nents, and specialty items such as elevators and equipment in the calcu-lation.

2.2 REGIONAL MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regional materials.

B. Credit MR 5.1: Provide a minimum of 10 percent of materials (by cost) that are

regionally manufactured materials. C. Credit MR 5.2: Provide a minimum of 20 percent of materials (by cost) that are

regionally extracted and manufactured materials. 2.3 CERTIFIED WOOD

A. Credit MR 7: Provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of wood-based materi-als that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

1. Wood-based materials include, but are not limited to, the following mate-

rials when made from wood, engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products:

(a) Rough carpentry

(b) Miscellaneous carpentry

(c) Metal-plate-connected wood trusses

(d) Finish carpentry

(e) Architectural woodwork

(f) Wood lockers

(g) Wood cabinets



2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D:

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 19. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond

melamine covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high mo-lecular weight polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L.

20. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 21. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 22. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 23. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 24. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 25. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 26. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L. 27. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L. 28. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 29. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 30. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L. 31. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 32. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 33. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 34. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight. 35. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 36. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 37. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 38. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 39. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 40. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.



41. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 42. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 43. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.

B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system,

use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D and the following chemical restrictions:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not

more than 250 g/L. 4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 9. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 10. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 11. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 12. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not

more than 250 g/L. 13. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more

than 350 g/L. 14. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 15. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 16. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 17. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 18. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 19. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L. 20. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L. 21. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L. 22. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L. 23. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than

1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon com-pounds containing one or more benzene rings).

24. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

(a) Acrolein

(b) Acrylonitrile

(c) Antimony

(d) Benzene

(e) Butyl benzyl phthalate

(f) Cadmium

(g) Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate

(h) Di-n-butyl phthalate

(i) Di-n-octyl phthalate

(j) 1,2-dichlorobenzene



(k) Diethyl phthalate

(l) Dimethyl phthalate

(m) Ethylbenzene

(n) Formaldehyde

(o) Hexavalent chromium

(p) Isophorone

(q) Lead

(r) Mercury

(s) Methyl ethyl ketone

(t) Methyl isobutyl ketone

(u) Methylene chloride

(v) Naphthalene

(w) Toluene (methylbenzene)

(x) 1,1,1-trichloroethane

(y) Vinyl chloride

C. Credit EQ 4.3: Carpeting and carpet cushion shall meet the testing & product re-quirements of the Carpet & Rug Institute’s “Green Label Plus” program. Carpet adhesives: VOC not more than 50 g/L.

D. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products or adhesives

that contain urea-formaldehyde resin. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Recycle and/or salvage at least 75% of con-struction, demolition, and land-clearing waste. Track and record waste streams by weight, and otherwise comply with Section 01505.

3.2 SITE DISTURBANCE

A. Implement the erosion & sedimentation control plan required by Section 01500, and provide photos of in-place measures.

B. Limit site disturbance – including earthwork and clearing of vegetation – to 40

feet beyond the building perimeter, 5 feet beyond primary roadway curbs, walk-ways and main utility branch trenches, and 25 feet beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces.



3.3 INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Credit EQ 3 and EQ 3.1: Develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan to protect the HVAC system, control pollutant sources, and in-terrupt contamination pathways for the construction and pre-occupancy phases of the building.

1. Meet or exceed the recommended approaches of the Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.

2. Sequence the installation of materials to avoid contamination of absorp-

tive materials such as insulation, carpeting, ceiling tile and gypsum wall board.

3. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture

damage. 4. Control and remove contaminants on the work site, including dust, dirt,

spills, and other accumulated moisture. 5. If air handlers must be used during construction, filtration media with a

Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 shall be used at each return air grill, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.

6. Replace all filtration media immediately prior to occupancy. Filtration me-

dia shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999 for media installed at the end of con-struction.

7. Provide 18 photographs (six photographs taken on three different occa-

sions during construction), along with identification of the SMACNA ap-proach featured by each photograph, in order to show consistent adher-ence to the protection requirements.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01410 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS


SECTION 01410 – STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for quality assurance and quality control to be completed by the Testing Laboratory, Builder, and/or the Geotechnical Engineer for the following structural items:

1. Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Precast Architectural Concrete. 5. Masonry. 6. Structural Steel. 7. Steel Joists. 8. Steel Decking. 9. Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 10. Earthwork.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Refer to the drawings for the Threshold Inspection Plan for requirements for additional inspections to be completed by the Threshold Inspector.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Unit Prices:

1. Cost Proposal: The Testing Laboratory’s proposal to the Builder shall contain unit price stipulations for specified tests and inspections and on an hourly basis for personnel. A total estimated price shall also be submitted.

B. Measurement and Payment

1. Payment of the Testing Laboratory: The Builder will pay for the initial Laboratory services for inspection and testing of materials for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



2. Payment for Substitution Testing: The Builder shall arrange for and pay for any additional samples and tests above those required by the Contract Documents as requested by the Builder for his convenience in performing the work.

3. Payment for Retesting: When initial tests indicate work does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Builder shall be liable for the cost for any additional inspections, sampling, testing, and retesting done by the Testing Laboratory.

4. Payment by Builder: The Builder shall furnish and pay for the following items if required:

a. Soil survey of the location of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials, and delivery to the Builder’s Testing Laboratory.

b. Samples of concrete aggregates and delivery to the Builder’s Testing Laboratory.

c. Concrete mix designs as prepared by his concrete supplier. d. Site-situated storage boxes for concrete cylinders e. Concrete coring, tests of below strength concrete, and load tests, if ordered

by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer. f. Certification of reinforcing steel mill order. g. Certification of structural steel mill order. h. Certification of portland cement, lime, fly ash. i. Certification of welders and preparation of Welding Procedure

Specifications. j. Tests, samples, and mock-ups of substitute material where the substitution

is requested by the Builder and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Owner, Architect or Engineer to establish equality with specified items.

k. The making and testing of concrete cylinders for the purpose of evaluating strength at time of form stripping or for post-tensioning or the time spent evaluating the in situ strength of concrete using the Maturity Method.

l. Any other tests when such costs are required by the Contract Documents to be paid by the Builder.

5. Payment for Tests of Suspected Deficient Work: If, in the opinion of the Building Official, Owner, Architect, or Engineer, any of the work of the Builder is not satisfactory, the Builder shall furnish additional tests that the Owner, Architect, or Engineer deem advisable to determine its proper construction. The Builder shall bear the cost of all such additional tests if they prove the questioned work to be unsatisfactory. If the questioned work is proven to be satisfactory, the Owner shall bear the cost of all such additional tests which will be paid via the Builder.

1.4 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Threshold Inspection: The Owner shall engage a separate agency to serve as a Threshold Inspector to provide Threshold Inspection services for the items outlined in the Threshold Inspection Plan. The scope of these services is not included in this section and is to be provided separately as outlined in the Threshold Inspection Plan. These inspections are mandatory for conformance to the legal requirements of the Florida Building Code and shall be in addition to the inspections and tests otherwise defined in this specification.



B. The Owner shall engage a Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection services for the foundations as outlined below in Article 3.109. D.

1.5 BUILDER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Furnishing Samples and Certificates: The Builder shall provide to the laboratory certificates and representative samples of materials proposed for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified.

B. Furnishing Casual Labor, Equipment and Facilities: The Builder shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the laboratory and otherwise facilitate the required inspections and tests.

C. The Builder shall provide a copy of the project plans and specifications to the Testing Laboratory prior to the start of construction and prior to any preinstallation meetings.

1.6 TESTING LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Testing Laboratory shall sample and test materials as they are being installed for compliance with specified acceptance criteria. The Testing Laboratory will report and interpret the test results. The Laboratory shall monitor and report on the installation of construction work and shall perform tests on the completed construction as required to indicate Builder’s compliance with the various material specifications governing this work.

B. The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspections on the following items:

1. Reinforcing steel placement. 2. Concrete work. 3. Welding of reinforcing steel. 4. Bolts to be installed in concrete. 5. Bolts, anchors, and reinforcing bars installed in hardened concrete (post-installed

anchors). 6. Inspection of structural steel, bolting, and welding material. 7. Welding of structural steel. 8. High-strength bolting. 9. Compacted earth fill. 10. Masonry work. 11. Cold-formed metal framing.

C. Inspections Required by Government Agencies: The Testing Laboratory shall perform inspections and submit reports and certifications as required by government agencies having jurisdiction over the aspects of the project covered by this specification.

D. Notification of Deficiencies in the Work: The Testing Laboratory shall notify the Architect, Engineer, and Builder within 24 hours of discovery of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the Work and other conditions not in compliance with the



requirements of the Contract Documents. Notification shall be by telephone or e-mail and then in writing.

E. Monitoring Product and Material Certifications: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for monitoring the submittals of product and material certifications from manufacturers and suppliers as specified in the Specifications and shall report to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer when those submittals are not made in a timely manner.

F. Limitations of Authority: The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the Builder and his Subcontractors.

1.7 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. The Testing Laboratory shall cooperate with the Architect, Engineer, and Builder and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice.

2. The Builder shall cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel and provide access to the work and to manufacturers’ operations.

3. Notification of Source Change: The Builder shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made.

B. Preinstallation Meetings: The Testing Laboratory shall attend preinstallation meetings with the Architect, Engineer, Builder, and material suppliers as required to coordinate materials inspection and testing requirements with the planned construction schedule and shall participate in such meetings throughout the course of the project.

C. Scheduling:

1. Advance Notice: The Builder shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. Failure to sufficiently notify may result in additional costs incurred by the Testing Laboratory that may be charged to the Builder.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Reports:

1. Information on Reports: The Testing Laboratory shall submit copies of reports of inspections and tests promptly. The reports shall contain at least the following information:

a. Project name.



b. Date report issued. c. Testing Laboratory name and address. d. Name and signature of inspector/technician. e. Date of inspection and/or sampling. f. Date of test. g. Identification of product and Specification section. h. Location in the project. i. Identification of inspection or test. j. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable). k. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents.

2. Copies: The Laboratory shall send signed copies of test and inspection reports to the following parties:

a. One electronic copy to the Owner or his/her representative. b. One electronic copy to the Builder. c. One electronic copy to the Architect. d. One electronic copy to the Engineer of Record. e. One electronic copy to the Threshold Inspector.

B. Discrepancy Log: The Testing Laboratory shall create and maintain a log of all discrepancies throughout the duration of the project.

1. Information on Log: This log shall include, but is not limited to:

a. Discrepancy date. b. Description of discrepancy. c. Drawing and/or detail reference. d. Description of as-built condition. e. Description of any remedial work performed. f. Status of discrepancy.

2. Submission Schedule: This log shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer on a periodic basis for review and comment. Upon completion of the Project, this log shall be submitted in its entirety as an attachment to the final signed report described below under Certifications.

C. Certification: Upon completion of the job, the Laboratory shall furnish to the Owner, Architect, Engineer of Record, and Builder, a statement signed by a licensed professional engineer that, to the best of their knowledge, required tests and inspections were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Qualifications of Testing Laboratory:

1. The Testing Laboratory shall meet the basic requirements of ASTM E 329 and shall submit to the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Builder evidence of current



accreditation from the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation, the AASHTO Accreditation Program or the “NIST” National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

2. The Testing Laboratory shall be an Approved Agency by the Building Official to perform Special Inspections and other tests and inspections as outlined in the applicable building code.

3. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field.

4. Qualifications of Welding Inspectors

a. Inspectors performing visual weld inspection shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1 Section 6.1.4. Inspectors shall have current certification as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI). Assistant inspectors, if any, shall be supervised by an Inspector and shall be qualified by training and experience to perform the specific functions to which they are assigned.

b. Inspectors performing nondestructive examinations of welds other than visual inspection (MT, PT, UT, and RT) shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, Section 6.14.6.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work to be performed by the Testing Laboratory shall be as specified in this Section of the Specification and as determined in meetings with the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Builder.

3.2 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

A. Field Inspection:

1. Shallow Foundation Elements:

a. Verify element width, length, depth, and elevation. b. Verify that forms are plumb and straight, braced against movement, and

lubricated for removal. c. Verify that carton forms, if any, are dry and neatly formed around piers.

2. Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Verify formwork at turndowns and slab edges is plumb and straight, braced against movement and lubricated for removal.



3. Columns and Walls:

a. Verify that forms are plumb and straight, braced against movement, lubricated for removal, and conform to approved shop drawings.

b. Verify proper dimensions and orientation. c. Verify top of column elevation is set in form and that it is 1/2 inch below the

future slab soffit.

4. Suspended Floors:

a. Verify that formwork conforms to signed and sealed shop drawings. b. Verify that shoring layout conforms to signed and sealed shop drawings. c. Verify that reshores at all levels conform to signed and sealed shop

drawings. d. Verify that forms are plumb and straight, braced against movement, and

lubricated for removal. e. Verify that the forms used for exposed finish surfaces are of the type

specified and provide a joint system as shown on the Architect’s drawings. f. Verify the proper dimensions of girders, beams, and joists. g. Verify that the slab thickness and top of slab elevation is correct. h. Verify the top of columns are 1/2 inch below the deck soffit.

5. Flat Slabs:

a. Verify that the top of columns are 1/2 inch below the deck soffit.

6. In-Situ Concrete Strength Verification Prior to Form Stripping: The Testing Laboratory shall verify that the concrete has reached the required minimum strength before form removal by evaluating the specified tests. Refer to Paragraph 3.4B.2.a for additional information regarding the tests.

3.3 CONCRETE REINFORCING

A. Quality Assurance: 1. Review the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) submitted by the Builder for

any reinforcing steel other than ASTM A 706 that is proposed to be welded for consistency with acceptable welding practices and AWS.

2. Review welder qualifications by certification or verify by retesting. Obtain welder certificates.

3.4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Quality Assurance:

1. Concrete Mix Designs: The Testing Laboratory shall review the submitted mix designs for conformance to the specifications and for suitability for use in the project.



2. Preinstallation Meetings: The Testing Laboratory shall attend the preinstallation meetings as noted in Specification 03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.

B. Field Testing: The following tests shall be completed by the Testing Laboratory:

1. During Concrete Placement:

a. Record the amount of water added and note if it exceeds the amount allowed to be added shown in the approved mix design.

b. Mold concrete test cylinders as specified below in Paragraph 3.a. c. Perform tests to determine slump, concrete temperature, unit weight, and

air entrainment as specified below. d. Record information for concrete test reports as specified below. e. Pick up and transport to Laboratory cylinders cast the previous day.

2. After Concrete Placement:

a. In-situ Concrete Strength Verification for Form Stripping: The Testing Laboratory shall perform the tests necessary to determine the concrete strength prior to form stripping:

1) If concrete strength for form stripping is to be determined using field-cured cylinders, the cylinder shall be broken at the time of form removal as directed by the Builder.

2) If concrete strength for form stripping is to be determined using the Maturity Method, the Testing Laboratory shall verify that the requirements of ASTM C 1074 are being followed and that the proper criteria for determining concrete strength by this method has been established and is being followed.

b. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results:

1) Cost of Investigations for Low Strength Concrete: The Builder shall pay for the costs of investigations of low strength concrete, as defined in Part I above.

2) Scope of Investigations: See Specification Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for the investigations that may be required by the Engineer. The Testing Laboratory will conduct these investigations if required.

c. Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete:

1) Verify maximum anchor tightening torque for all applicable post-installed anchors.

2) Provide pull tests on individual anchors as specified in the ICC Evaluation Services Report, on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer-of-Record.

d. Floor Flatness and Levelness Measuring: Perform tests as defined below.



e. Testing of Concrete Floor Slabs for Acceptability to Receive an Adhesive-Applied, Low-Permeable Floor Covering: Perform tests as defined below.

f. Testing of Non-Shrink Grout for Base Plates, Bearing Plates, and Precast Wall Panels:

1) Compressive Strength Tests: Compressive strength of grout shall be determined by testing grout cubes according to the requirements of ASTM C 109 - Modified. Test one set of three cubes at one day, and one set of three cubes at 28 days.

2) Frequency of Testing: One set of cubes (6 cubes) shall be made for every ten base plates and bearing plates or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each day's operation. One set of cubes shall be made for each day's operation of grouting wall panels.

3. Standards for Concrete Tests:

a. Concrete Test Cylinders: Mold and test concrete cylinders as described below:

1) Cylinder Molding and Testing: Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and Laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Cylinders may be either 6” in diameter by 12” or 4” in diameter by 8”, however, the diameter of the cylinder shall be at least three times the nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate in the mix tested. All of the cylinders for each class of concrete shall be of the same dimension for all sets of that class.

2) Field Samples: Field samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 172 at the point of placement.

3) Quantity of Cylinders: Each set of test cylinders shall consist of a minimum of four standard test cylinders.

4) Frequency of Testing: A set of test cylinders shall be made according to the following minimum frequency guidelines:

a) One set for each class of concrete taken not less than once a day.

b) Mat Foundation: One set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof.

c) Spread Footings: One set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof.

d) Floors: One set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each 5,000 square foot of floor area.

e) Shear Walls: One set for each 50 cubic yards but not less than two sets per floor.

f) All Other Concrete: A minimum of one set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each 5,000 square foot of area for walls.

g) No more than one set of cylinders at a time shall be made from any single truck.



h) If the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing as specified above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used.

i) The above frequencies assume that one batch plant will be used for each pour. If more than one batch plant is used, the frequencies cited above shall apply for each plant used.

5) The cylinders shall be numbered, dated, and the point of concrete placement in the building recorded.

6) For concrete specified on the drawings to reach the required strength at 28 days, break one cylinder of the set at seven days, two 6” by 12” cylinders or three 4” by 8” cylinders at 28 days, and keep one in reserve for testing at the Engineer’s direction.

7) For concrete specified on the drawings to reach the required strength at 56 days, break one cylinder of the set at seven days, one cylinder at 28 days, two 6” by 12” cylinders or three 4” by 8” cylinders at 56 days, and one kept in reserve for testing at the Engineer’s direction.

8) Cylinder Storage Box: The Builder shall be responsible for providing a protected concrete cylinder wooden storage box at a point on the job site mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory. The box shall be constructed and equipped to maintain the environment specified for initial curing in ASTM C 31.

9) Transporting Cylinders: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for transporting the cylinders to the Laboratory in a protected environment such that no damage or ill effect will occur to the concrete cylinders including loss of moisture, freezing temperatures or jarring.

10) Information on Concrete Test Reports: The Testing Laboratory shall make and distribute concrete test reports after each job cylinder is broken. Such reports shall contain the following information:

a) Truck number and ticket number. b) Concrete Batch Plant. c) Mix design number. d) Accurate location of pour in the structure. e) Strength requirement. f) Date cylinders made and broken. g) Technician making cylinders. h) Concrete temperature at placing. i) Air temperature at point of placement in the structure. j) Amount of water added to the truck at the batch plant and at

the site and whether or not it exceeds the amount allowed by the mix design.

k) Slump. l) Unit weight. m) Air content.



n) Cylinder compressive strengths with type of failure if concrete does not meet Specification requirements. Seven day breaks are to be flagged if they are less than 60% of the required 28 day strength. 28 day breaks are to be brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer in writing if either cylinder fails to meet specification requirements.

b. Slump Tests: Slump Tests (ASTM C 143) shall be completed at the beginning of concrete placement for each batch plant and for each set of test cylinders made. The slump test shall be made from concrete taken from the end of the concrete truck chute. The concrete shall be considered acceptable if the slump is within the slump tolerance noted on the mix design submittal form for that class of concrete.

c. Air Entrainment: Air entrainment tests (ASTM C 231 or C 173, C 173 only for lightweight concrete) shall be made at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. Samples for air entrainment tests shall be taken at the point of placement.

d. Concrete Temperature: Concrete temperature at placement shall be measured (ASTM C 1064) at the same time slump tests are made as cited above.

e. Unit Weight Test: ASTM C 138.

f. Testing of Concrete Floor Slabs for Acceptability to Receive an Adhesive-Applied, Low-Permeable Floor Covering:

1) The following tests shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory as a part of quality assurance testing to insure that the proper moisture condition and alkalinity of the substrate has been achieved prior to installing adhesive-applied, low-permeability floor coverings such as vinyl composition tile (VCT), linoleum, sheet vinyl, vinyl-backed carpet, rubber, athletic flooring, synthetic turf, wood, acrylic terrazzo, thin-set tile, epoxy overlays and adhesives, waterproofing, et.al.

2) Moisture Vapor Emission Rate: Perform testing according to ASTM F 1869 to determine if the moisture emission rate from the floor is below the flooring manufacturer’s maximum recommended value but not greater than five pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours.

3) Relative Humidity Determination Test: As an alternate to the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate Test, and if agreed to by the Builder, Architect and Owner, perform testing according to ASTM F 2170 to determine if the relative humidity of the concrete slab is below the flooring manufacturer’s maximum recommended value but not greater than 75%.

4) Alkalinity Testing: Perform testing in accordance with ASTM F 710, Paragraph 5.3, to determine if the pH level of the concrete slab surface is below the flooring manufacturer’s maximum recommended value but not greater than 10. Perform one test per 1,000 square feet with a minimum of three tests within the total area being tested.

4. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete:



a. Strength Test: A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two six inch cylinder breaks or three four inch cylinder breaks from each set of cylinders tested at the time indicated above.

b. Quality Control Charts and Logs: The Testing Laboratory shall keep the following quality control logs and charts for each class of concrete containing more than 2,000 cubic yards. The records shall be kept for each batch plant and submitted on a weekly basis with cylinder test reports:

1) Number of strength tests made to date. 2) Strength test results containing the average of all strength tests to

date, the high test result, the low test result, the standard deviation, and the coefficient of variation.

3) Number of tests under specified strength. 4) A histogram plotting the number of strength test cylinders versus

compressive strength. 5) Quality control chart plotting compressive strength test results for

each test. 6) Quality control chart plotting moving average for strength where each

point plotted is the average strength of three previous test results. 7) Quality control chart plotting moving average for range where each

point plotted is the average of 10 previous ranges.

c. Acceptance Criteria: The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met:

1) The average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required f'c.

2) No individual strength test falls below the required f'c by more than the greater of 10% of f’c or 500 PSI.

d. If either of the above Acceptance Criteria requirements is not met, the Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Engineer by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests.

C. Causes for Rejection of Concrete: The Builder shall reject concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons:

1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number). 2. Environmental Conditions: Environmental condition limits shall be as follows

unless appropriate provisions in concreting practices have been made for cold or hot weather:

a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 40°F and rising or the average daily temperature cannot have been lower than 40°F for 3 consecutive days unless the temperature rose above 50°F for at least one-half of any of those 24 hour periods.



b. Hot Weather: Environmental conditions must be such that cause an evaporation rate from the concrete surface of 0.2 lb./sq. ft./hr. or less as determined by Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R-91.

Concrete may be placed at other environmental condition ranges only with approval of the job inspector for the Testing Laboratory or other duly appointed representative.

3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95°F shall not be placed in the structure. 4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Slumps outside the limits specified. 6. Excessive Age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant

departure or before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Laboratory job inspector or other duly appointed representative.

D. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: Concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Builder. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. Tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C 94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will not exceed the specified water cement ratio for the design mix. The Builder and Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer and each other of tickets not meeting the criteria specified.

3.5 MASONRY


1. Concrete Masonry Unit: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, verify compliance with ASTM C 90 and the strength required by design. Verification may be by reviewing certification from unit producer showing compliance.

2. Review field welder qualifications by certification or verify by retesting. Obtain welder certificates.

B. Field Testing:

1. Masonry Strength Testing:

a. Verification Testing Frequency: Verification of masonry strength (f’m) will be performed at the beginning of masonry construction and during construction for each 5,000 square feet of wall area or portion thereof.

b. Mortar:

1) Throughout construction, verify the proportions of the site-prepared mortar mix comply with the requirements of ASTM C 270 for the type specified.

2) Verify the proportions of materials in premixed or preblended mortar comply with the requirements of ASTM C 270 for the type specified as delivered to the site.

c. Grout:



1) Prior to grouting, verify the proportions of site-prepared grout mix comply with the requirements of ASTM C 476 for each type of grout used.

2) Verify the proportions of materials in premixed or preblended grout comply with the requirements of ASTM C 476 as delivered to the site.

3) For grout pre-mixed at a batch plant or otherwise not prepared on site, grout shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019. Prepare one set of grout samples for testing at seven days and two sets for testing at 28 days.

d. For each type of wall construction indicated for testing, test representative masonry prisms by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM C 1314, and as follows:

1) Prepare one set of prisms for testing at 7 days and one set for testing at 28 days.

2) For concrete masonry prisms adhere to requirements as specified under preconstruction testing. Build prisms on job using same materials and methods as for wall construction. Store prisms in air at temperature not less than 65°F in a facility supplied by the Builder where they will be undisturbed for seven (7) days. After seven (7) days, transport to laboratory in a manner which will not disturb mortar bond.

3) Cap each prism with suitable material to provide bearing surfaces on each end.

a) Plane within 0.003 inch. b) Approximately perpendicular to the axis of the prism.

4) The preparation of prisms shall be observed by the testing agency that will test the prisms.

e. Report test results in writing and in form specified under each test method, to Architect and Builder, on same day tests are made.

f. Retests: Where prism tests indicate non-compliance with specified requirements, additional testing shall be performed at the frequency of two additional tests for each unsatisfactory test. The cost of such additional testing shall be the responsibility of the Builder. Where retesting fails to indicate conformance with specified requirements, any masonry construction represented by unsatisfactory tests shall be removed and replaced with acceptable masonry construction.

2. Testing of Non-Shrink Grout for Base Plates and Bearing Plates:

a. Compressive Strength Tests: Compressive strength of grout shall be determined by testing grout cubes according to the requirements of ASTM C 109 - Modified. Test one set of three cubes at one day, and one set of three cubes at 28 days.

b. Frequency of Testing: One set of cubes (6 cubes) shall be made for every ten base plates and bearing plates or fraction thereof but not less than one



set for each day's operation. One set of cubes shall be made for each day's operation of grouting wall panels.

C. Field Inspection:

1. Anchors:

a. Verify maximum anchor tightening torque for all post-installed anchors.

2. Welding of Reinforcing Bars: Observe the welding of reinforcing bars.

3.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Scope of Work:

1. Contract Obligations:

a. Builder Responsibility: The Builder shall pay for initial shop and field inspections and tests as required during the fabrication and erection of the structural steel.

b. Testing Laboratory Responsibility: The inspection by the Testing Laboratory of the Fabricator’s work shall be in sequence, timely, and performed in such a manner so that corrections can be made without delaying the progress of the work. Inspections shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of two years of experience in structural steel testing and inspection. Refer to Paragraph 1.9A.4 for special requirements for welding inspectors. The Testing Laboratory shall provide test reports of inspections. All test reports shall indicate types and locations of defects found during inspection, the measures required and performed to correct such defects, statements of final approval of welding and bolting of shop and field connections, and other fabrication and erection data pertinent to the safe and proper welding and bolting of shop and field connections. Weld inspection reports shall be signed by an inspector with current certification as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI). In addition to the parties listed in this Specification the Fabricator and Erector shall receive copies of the test reports.

c. Rejection of Material or Workmanship: The Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory reserve the right to reject any material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents at any time during the progress of the work. However, this provision does not allow waiving the obligation for timely, in sequence inspections.

B. Quality Assurance:

1. Verify the fabrication shop’s certification from AISC. 2. Verify that the fabricator’s fabrication and quality control procedures provide a

sound basis for inspection control of workmanship and of the ability to conform to construction documents and industry standards. Review the procedures for



completeness and adequacy relative to code requirements for the fabricator’s finished product.


C. Source Testing: The Testing Laboratory shall provide the following tests at the designated fabrication shops:

1. Test welds completed in the shop according to Paragraph H “Weld Testing” below.

2. Test bolted connections completed in the shop according to Paragraph I “High-Strength Bolt Testing.”

D. Source Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall provide the following inspections at the designated fabrication shops:

1. An initial shop inspection prior to the start of any fabricating work shall be made to accomplish the following:

a. Perform tasks outlined in Paragraphs G.1, G.2 and G.3 of welding inspection duties described below in Paragraph G “Weld Inspection and Process Monitoring” when shop welding is to be performed.

b. Perform tasks outlined in paragraph J.1 of bolt inspection duties described below in Paragraph I “High-Strength Bolt Inspection and Process Monitoring” when shop bolting involves joints that are designated on the plans as Pretensioned or Slip-Critical.

2. Process Monitoring:

a. Provide continuous or periodic monitoring of welding as described below in Paragraph G “Weld Inspection and Process Monitoring.”

b. Provide continuous or periodic monitoring of bolting as described below in Paragraph I “High-Strength Bolt Inspection and Process Monitoring” of high-strength bolt installation in pre-tensioned or slip-critical joints using turn-of-the-nut without matchmarking or calibrated wrench method of bolt installation.

c. Provide periodic verification of specified camber of steel beams.

E. Field Testing: The Testing Laboratory shall provide the following tests in the field:

1. Test welds completed in the field according to Paragraph H “Weld Testing:” below.

2. Test bolted connections completed in the field according to Paragraph I “High-Strength Bolt Testing.”

3. Perform bend tests on completed shear connectors attached to beams as required according to procedures outlined in AWS D1.1. In addition, perform field bend tests on an additional 2% of completed shear connectors on each beam but not less than one connector per beam.

4. Testing of Non-Shrink Grout for Base Plates:



a. Compressive Strength Tests: Compressive strength of grout shall be determined by testing grout cubes according to the requirements of ASTM C 109 - Modified. Test one set of three cubes at one day, and one set of three cubes at 28 days.

b. Frequency of Testing: One set of cubes (6 cubes) shall be made for every ten base plates and bearing plates or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each day's operation. One set of cubes shall be made for each day's operation of grouting wall panels.

F. Field Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall provide the following inspections in the field:

1. Inspect galvanized HSS and other cold-worked structural steel members for cracking or other damage resulting from galvanizing process. Endeavor to complete inspections prior to erection of these members. Immediately notify Builder and Architect/Engineer of any irregularities discovered.

2. Provide continuous or periodic monitoring of field welding as described below in Paragraph G “Weld Inspection and Process Monitoring.”

3. Provide continuous or periodic monitoring of field bolting as described below in Paragraph I “High-Strength Bolt Inspection and Process Monitoring” of high-strength bolt installation in pre-tensioned or slip-critical joints using turn-of-the-nut without matchmarking or calibrated wrench method of bolt installation.

4. Inspect welded or bolted connections that were completed, but not inspected, in the shop. Perform inspections according to Paragraph G “Weld Inspection and Process Monitoring” and/or Paragraph I “High-Strength Bolt Inspection and Process Monitoring” as appropriate.

5. Obtain the planned erection procedure, and review with the Erector’s supervisory personnel.

6. Check the installation of base plates for proper leveling, grout type, and grout application.

7. Check structural steel as received in the field for possible shipping damage, workmanship, and identification marking to conform to AISC 360 for structural steel and specified ASTM standards for other steel.

8. Verify that surveys are occurring as specified to check plumbness and frame alignment as erection progresses. Review the submitted survey report.

9. Periodically inspect the steel frame for such items as bracing and stiffening details, member locations, and joint details at each connection for compliance with approved construction documents.

10. Endeavor to guard the Owner against the Builder cutting, grinding, reaming, or making any other field modification to structural steel without the prior approval of the Engineer. Report any noted unauthorized modifications to the Owner and Engineer.

G. Weld Inspection and Process Monitoring: The Testing Laboratory shall make the following inspections of the welds and welding processes. Welds performed in the fabricating shop may be inspected in the field unless continuous monitoring of the welding process is herein specified or if access in the field due to other work or shop finishes makes field inspection impractical:



1. Approve Welding Procedure Specifications submitted by the Builder. Approve any changes submitted by the Builder to any WPS that has already been approved. Obtain the Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR) for each successful WPS qualification.

2. Periodically verify welding electrodes to be used and other welding consumables as the job progresses.

3. Periodically observe joint preparation, assembly practice, welding techniques including preheating and sequence, and the performance of welders with sufficient frequency to assure compliance with code and contract document requirements. Check preheating to assure conformance with AWS D1.1, Section 5.6. Verify procedure for control of distortion and shrinkage stresses.

4. Continuously observe joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and runout plates for welded moment connections and column splices.

5. Periodically provide visual inspection of the root pass of partial and complete joint penetration welds.

6. Visually inspect 100 % of welds for proper size, length, location, and weld quality in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all welding shall be considered statically loaded nontubular connections.

7. Visually inspect 100% of completed shear connectors on each beam. 8. Visually inspect 100% of the welds of anchors to embedded plates that are to be

cast into concrete elements.

H. Weld Testing:

1. Perform nondestructive examination services using a qualified technician with the necessary equipment to perform the following:

a. Nondestructive examination conducted in accordance with the specific requirements for the item being examined including radiographic (RT), ultrasonic (UT), magnetic particle (MT), or dye-penetrant inspection (PT). Nondestructive inspection procedures shall conform to AWS D1.1.

b. Interpret, record, and report results of the nondestructive tests. c. Mark for repair, any area not meeting Specification requirements.

Correction of rejected welds shall be made in accordance with AWS D1.1. d. Re-examine repair areas and interpret, record, and report the results of

examinations of repair welds. e. Verify that quality of welds meet the requirements of AWS D1.1.

2. Fillet Welds: Provide the following:

a. MT test a minimum of 10% of the length of each fillet weld exceeding 5/16". b. Periodic MT testing of representative fillet welds 5/16" and less but need

not exceed 10% of all such welds, except as required for high rejection rates as indicated in the following paragraph.

c. Increase MT testing rate for welders having a high rejection rate as required to ensure acceptable welds.

3. Partial Joint Penetration (PJP) Welds, including Flare-Bevel Groove Welds: Provide the following:



a. MT test a minimum of 25% of the length of each PJP weld exceeding 5/16" effective throat.

b. Periodic MT testing of representative PJP welds 5/16” and less but need not exceed 10% of all such welds, except as required for high rejection rates as indicated in the following paragraph.


4. Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) Welds: Provide the following:

a. All CJP welds exceeding 5/16" thickness shall be 100% UT tested per AWS D1.1 Clause 6 Part F. The Testing Laboratory shall review the CJP joints to determine where geometry or accessibility precludes the use of standard scanning patterns per AWS D1.1 Clause 6 Part F. At these locations the testing laboratory shall develop and submit for approval a written testing procedure in accordance with AWS D1.1 Annex S.

b. Periodic MT testing of representative CJP welds 5/16” and less not to exceed 10% of all such welds, except as required for high rejection rates as indicated in the following paragraph.


5. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Visual, MT, PT shall be per AWS D1.1 Table 6.1. b. UT testing shall be per AWS D1.1 6.13.1 and Table 6.2.

6. Welds of Anchors to Embedded Plates:

a. Headed Studs: Perform field bend tests according to AWS D1.1 on 2% of the studs welded to plates, but not less than one stud per plate.

b. Deformed Bar Anchors: Perform MT testing on 10% of deformed bar anchors larger than #5 bar.

7. The costs of repairing defective welds and the costs of retesting by the Testing Laboratory providing services shall be borne by the Builder. If removal of a backing strip is required by the Testing Laboratory to investigate a suspected weld defect, such cost shall be borne by the Builder.

I. High-Strength Bolt Inspection and Process Monitoring: The Testing Laboratory shall perform the following inspections for connections joined with high-strength bolts. Bolting performed in the shop may be inspected in the field unless continuous monitoring of the bolting operation is specified herein:

1. Observe preinstallation verification testing of the pretensioning method to be used in accordance with the requirements of the “Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts”.

2. Check daily the calibration of impact wrenches used in field bolted connections. 3. Inspect bolt installation for 100% of high strength bolted connections according to

inspection procedures outlined in the "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".



4. Monitoring of Bolting Installation: a. Periodic Monitoring: All joint types and bolt installation methods shall be

monitored on a periodic basis.

J. High-Strength Bolt Testing: The Testing Laboratory shall perform the following tests for connections joined with high-strength bolts:

1. Perform Arbitration Testing according to procedures outlined in the "Specification for Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts" when a disagreement exists between the Testing Laboratory and the Fabricator as to the minimum tension of installed bolts that have been inspected according to paragraph below.

3.7 STEEL JOISTS

A. Scope of Work: The Testing Laboratory shall perform inspection of steel joists as described herein.

B. Quality Assurance:

1. Verify that the fabricator maintains detailed quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of workmanship and of the ability to conform to approved construction documents and industry standards. Verify that these procedures are complete and adequate relative to code requirements for fabricator’s scope of work.

2. Verify welding procedures, welder qualifications and weld material prior to the start of work.


C. Source Inspection:

1. Provide periodic inspection of the welding work in progress. 2. Visually inspect 100% of welds prior to shipment of shop welded assemblies. 3. Verify camber requirements.

D. Field Inspection: The duties of the Testing Laboratory shall be as follows:

1. Inspect joists for damage during shipment. 2. Visually inspect 100% of welded chord splices for compliance with SJI and

project specifications. 3. Confirm bolting of joists to supports at column lines as required by OSHA

requirements.

3.8 STEEL DECKING

A. Field Inspection:



1. Check steel deck as received in the field for possible shipping damage, workmanship, and identification marking to conform to specified ASTM standards for steel deck.

2. Periodically monitor the method of attaching the steel floor and roof decking to the structural frame.

3. Visually inspect 100% of the welding or other attachment method of steel deck to the structure and at sidelaps.

3.9 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

A. Field Inspection: 1. Cold-Formed Steel Trusses:

a. Verify that the cold-formed steel trusses temporary restraint or bracing and the permanent individual truss member restraint or bracing are installed according to the approved truss submittal.

3.10 EARTHWORK


1. Welder Qualifications: Verify welder qualifications either by certification and/or by retesting. Obtain welder certificates.

B. Field Testing:

1. Compacted Fill:

a. Verification of Fill Material: Perform classification and testing to verify that the fill material to be used complies with the project specifications.

b. Field Density Testing: Perform field density testing as described below:

1) Field density tests shall be run according to ASTM D 2937 or ASTM D 6938 as applicable.

2) Acceptance Criteria: The results of field density tests by the Laboratory will be considered satisfactory if the average of any three consecutive tests has a value not less than the required density with no single test falling more than 2 percent below the required density and the moisture content conforms to the requirements of the specification.

3) Test Frequency for Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade:

a) Make at least one field density test of the natural subgrade for every 2500 square feet of paved area or building slab but in no case less than three tests.

b) In each compacted fill layer or lift, make one field density test for every 2500 square feet of building slab or paved area but in no case less than three tests.



c. Report Copies: Moisture-density curves and results of field density tests shall be submitted to the parties specified earlier in this section.

d. Additional Testing: If reports by the Laboratory indicate field densities lower than specified, additional tests will be run by the Laboratory with at least the frequencies scheduled above on recompacted fill and/or natural subgrade. The Testing Laboratory shall notify the Builder on a timely basis for any required retesting so as not to delay the work. The costs of such tests shall be liable to the Builder.

2. Stabilized Soil Via Vibroflotation and Pressure Cement Grout:

a. Verification of Fill Material: Perform classification and testing to verify that the fill material to be used complies with the project specifications.

b. Standard Penetration Testing: Perform standard penetration testing as described below:

1) Standard penetration testing shall be run according to ASTM D 1586. 2) Acceptance Criteria: The results of standard penetration testing by

the Laboratory will be considered satisfactory if the average of any three consecutive tests has a value not less than the required allowable bearing pressure with no single test falling more than 2 percent below the required allowable bearing pressure and the moisture content conforms to the requirements of the specification.

3) Test Frequency for stabilized soil beneath Spread Footings and Mat Foundations: Make at least one standard penetration test at each spread footing, one for each twenty-five lineal feet of wall and one for each 2,500 square feet of mat foundation area or fraction thereof.

c. Report Copies: Results of standard penetration testing shall be submitted to the parties specified earlier in this section.

d. Additional Testing: If reports by the Laboratory indicate allowable bearing pressures lower than specified, additional tests will be run by the Laboratory with at least the frequencies scheduled above. The Testing Laboratory shall notify the Builder on a timely basis for any required retesting so as not to delay the work. The costs of such tests shall be liable to the Builder.

3. Spread Footings

a. Concrete Cylinders: Make and test concrete cylinders as specified for Cast-in-Place Concrete.

4. Mat Footings

a. Concrete Cylinders: Make and test concrete cylinders as specified for Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Field Inspection by the Testing Laboratory:



1. The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection of materials used in foundation elements as described below.

2. Compacted Fill:

a. Subgrade below Compacted Fill: Observe and verify that the subgrade below compacted fill has been properly prepared before compact fill construction begins.

b. During placement and compaction of fill, determine that the material being used and the maximum lift thickness comply with the specifications.

3. Verify that surveys and vibration monitoring are occurring as specified to evaluate existing surrounding structures before, during, and after Vibroflotation process. Review the submitted survey and vibration monitoring reports and notify the Builder if any specification requirements are exceeded.

D. Foundation Inspection by the Geotechnical Engineer: The Geotechnical Engineer of Record shall provide inspection service for the following items before and during foundation installation as appropriate for the foundation type. The Geotechnical Engineer shall submit written field inspection reports promptly after inspection to the parties listed above and report his findings after each inspection by telephone or e-mail to the Engineer.

1. Spread Footing:

a. Subgrade: Verify that foundation bearing conditions are consistent with soil report tests and that the footing is being installed in the proper soil strata at the proper elevation. Make recommendations regarding adjustment to subgrade or bearing elevation if subgrade is not adequate to support footing.

2. Mat Footing:

a. Subgrade: Verify that foundation bearing conditions are consistent with soil report tests and that the footing is being installed in the proper soil strata at the proper elevation. Make recommendations regarding adjustment to subgrade or bearing elevation if subgrade is not adequate to support footing.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01500 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS


B. Utility outages and dig permits are covered in Section 01016. Permanent

installation and hookup of utility lines are described in other sections. 1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work, including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Temporary utilities such as water, electricity, and telephone; 2. Field offices and sanitary facilities for the Builder's personnel; 3. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, and canopies; traffic control and

pedestrian control devices;

4. Erosion control measures; and

5. Directional and informational signage.

B. Work Not Included:

1. Except for the requirement that equipment furnished by subcontractors shall comply with pertinent safety regulations, such equipment as normally furnished by the individual trades in execution of their own portions of the Work, is not part of this Section.

2. The permanent installation and hookup of utility lines are described in other

sections and are not part of this Section except as related to the metered cost of such utilities once established.

1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the Work.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Builder shall present a jobsite management plan in the form of a scaled, marked-up site plan for the Owner’s review at or prior to the Pre-Construction Conference. This drawing shall identify, at a minimum:

1. Temporary fencing with gated point(s) of access 2. Materials delivery & storage areas 3. Field office or storage trailers 4. Temporary accessibility features including paved or unpaved roads,

sidewalks, bicycle paths, ramps, curb cuts, canopies, barricades, or other means of maintaining safe and ADA-accessible routes through or around the site

5. Waste collection (dumpsters) 6. Signage and striping 7. Paths for emergency egress 8. Onsite staff parking 9. Tree protection 10. Restricted access routes for vehicles and equipment belonging to the

Builder and its subcontractors, vendors, and employees entering upon the UF Campus

B. As construction progresses, the Builder shall identify any required disruptions or

restrictions of roads, sidewalks, bicycle lanes, or other means of access. Approval for such disruptions shall be secured prior to scheduling related work by submitting a written request to the University project manager. This request shall be accompanied by a site sketch, start and end dates, an explanation of the reasons(s) for the request, and an illustration or description of the temporary controls to be used to maintain safe access. THE FULL CLOSING OF VEHICULAR ROADS (i.e., all lanes) ON THE UF CAMPUS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED.

C. A formal traffic control plan – including credentials of plan developer – shall

be submitted for review when lane closures are anticipated. See paragraph 3.1 of this section.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. USAGE, ESTABLISHMENT, and COST

1. The Builder shall include in the Cost of Work both the installation of any temporary utilities and the (monthly) usage fees for same. This includes, but is not limited to: potable water for drinking and/or construction trailers; water for cleaning, construction, flushing, commissioning, and testing of plumbing and mechanical systems; convenience power for tools, lighting, and/or construction trailers; temporary power for construction and testing; telecommunications lines for phone, fax, or Internet service. Current PPD utility rates can be viewed at www.ppd.ufl.edu/currentrates.htm.

2. For use of University-owned utilities, the Builder shall establish a work

order with billing account information, with PPD Work Management (392-1121).

3. Prior to beginning work that involves connections to the University’s utilities

systems, the Builder shall submit – at least 48 hours in advance – a work request to PPD Work Management (392-1121) for installation of temporary meter(s) by PPD Utility Services.

B. WATER

1. The point(s) of connection shall be designated by PPD. 2. A temporary potable water meter will be furnished and installed by PPD

Utility Services. Allow 14 days lead time for the Owner-furnished meter. The Builder shall furnish and install all necessary related accessories.

3. Builder shall furnish and install all necessary temporary piping and water

supply and, upon completion of the Work, remove same. C. ELECTRICITY

1. The point(s) of connection shall be designated by PPD. 2. A temporary electric meter will be furnished and installed by PPD Utility

Services, which shall also energize service. Allow 14 days lead time for the Owner-furnished meter. The Builder shall furnish and install all necessary related accessories (CTs, compatible meter socket/can, etc.).

http://www.ppd.ufl.edu/currentrates.htm



3. Builder shall furnish and install all necessary temporary wiring and, upon completion of the Work, remove same.

(a) All temporary wiring provided by the Builder must conform to the

requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC), the Industrial Safety Commission, and local requirements. In addition, all wire used shall be fused to adequately protect that wire according to the NEC.

(b) The Builder shall have an adequate number of outlets and each

outlet shall be properly and clearly labeled with the maximum voltage and fuse protection.

(c) Where temporary lighting is used, outlets shall consist of a

weatherproof socket properly insulated and provided with a locking type wire guard.

(d) All devices shall be properly grounded.

4. Provide area distribution boxes located such that the individual trades may furnish and use extension cords 100 feet in length (maximum) to obtain power and lighting at points where needed for work, inspection, and safety.

5. Temporary electric facilities shall be inspected and approved by PPD and

EH&S prior to energizing by PPD Utility Services. 6. In keeping with UF sustainability policies, and to minimize the cost of utility

services, the Builder shall minimize the use of temporary or permanent lighting, particularly when the jobsite is inactive. The use of energy efficient lamps is encouraged if the energy savings justifies any additional expense.

D. TELEPHONE AND INTERNET

7. The Builder shall make arrangements with the Office of Information

Technology (OIT) or HealthNet – as applicable – or the local utility for temporary phone, fax, and/or Internet service lines.

E. SANITARY FACILITIES

1. Furnish and install temporary sanitary facilities for use by all construction

personnel. 2. The Builder shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition

such accommodations for the use of employees and subcontractors as may be necessary to comply with the regulations of the State Board of Health.

3. Unless expressly allowed by the Owner, existing sanitary facilities may not

be used by construction personnel, subcontractors, or vendors.



2.2 PERMANENT (BUILDING) UTILITIES

A. Once permanent power, chilled water, and other permanent metered utilities are established, the cost of such utilities shall be borne by the Builder as a cost of the Work until Substantial Completion.

B. Utility services will not be provided until new meters are installed and certified to be

operating properly by PPD Utility Services. 2.3 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. TRAILERS – Office and Storage

1. Provide stairs and railings as required by OSHA.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. GENERAL: Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, steps, platforms, bridges, and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the Work in compliance with pertinent safety and other regulations.

B. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURES: For all projects requiring dumpsters, where the

dumpster is located within the geographical area of campus bounded by SW 13th Street, West University Avenue, Gale Lemerand Drive, and Stadium Road, the dumpster shall be enclosed by a solid wooden fence installed around the entire perimeter. This fence shall be a minimum of 6' high and shall be constructed of vertical 1 x 6's on a 2 x 4 frame. Pre-fabricated sections are acceptable.

C. TREE PROTECTION: See tree protection guidelines, Appendix I, University of

Florida Construction Standards, Volume 1. 2.5 TEMPORARY FENCING

A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary fence to prevent entry of the public into the jobsite. Fencing shall be six-foot high sealed wood or chain link fencing with dark-colored inlaid fabric mounted on fixed posts of metal or wood for temporary parking and work area. Open trenches and other hazards shall be enclosed in a fixed wire fence or wooden barricades with flashing lights.

B. Maintain the security and appearance of fencing throughout construction.



2.6 EROSION and SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. The Builder shall develop a “Sedimentation and Erosion Control Plan” per the UF Design & Construction Standards (Appendix C).

B. This plan shall be submitted for review and approval prior to beginning any onsite work or applying for dig permits.

C. The Builder shall erect and maintain control measures as outlined in the plan

throughout construction. Such measures may include gravel “wash-down stations” at jobsite entry and exit points, silt fencing, and temporary grass seeding.

D. See Section 02100 Site Preparation for more information.

2.7 SIGNAGE

A. Install and maintain the appearance of the standard University of Florida Board of Trustees Project Sign in a location directed by the University Project Manager.

B. Florida Statutes 812.014 and 810.09 require that construction fences be adorned

with the following sign: "WARNING (red on white) - This area is a designated construction site. Anyone trespassing on this property shall, upon conviction, be guilty of a felony.” (black on white) Signs shall be approximately 14" x 18".

C. The University of Florida Police Department (UFPD) requires the following anti-

harassment notification be posted on each leg of the construction fence: “In case of harassment from anyone at this construction site, telephone 392-1111 to notify the University of Florida Police Department.”

D. Provide way-finding, directional, and other informational signage as needed to

safely accommodate the public’s need to pass around or through the Work. This shall include, as needed, directional assistance for ADA-compliant paths of travel throughout the duration of construction.

E. No other signs or advertisements are permitted.

2.8 CLEANLINESS

A. The Builder shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material and

rubbish, and shall remove from the premises all rubbish, implements, surplus materials, and temporary facilities provided during the course of the Work, leaving spaces broom clean.

2.9 OTHER

A. Existing utility infrastructure (electrical, telecommunications, GRU water main) shall remain in service until new utilities have been fully installed, inspected, tested, and accepted.



B. Given the site’s proximity in the middle of campus, arrange for material deliveries, waste pickup, and other heavy vehicle traffic to be done early in the morning (i.e., prior to 7:30 AM).

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The Builder shall not mobilize and/or erect temporary facilities until the jobsite management plan has been reviewed and approved by the Owner.

B. Prior to erection of fencing, the Builder shall review the proposed fencing plan

onsite with the University Project Manager and representatives of EH&S, UFPD, and the Americans with Disabilities Act Office.

C. Directional signage shall be installed simultaneously with fencing and/or temporary

roads or paths. D. Traffic maintenance devices and procedures (signage, barricades and cones,

flagmen, etc.) shall be per Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) standards (2003 Edition, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), with Revision No. 1 Incorporated, dated November 2004). Work zone traffic control schemes and devices shall only be implemented or installed in the field by or under the direct supervision of a person who has satisfactorily completed the training requirements prescribed by FDOT Topic No: 625-010-010-f, “MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC TRAINING,” Work Zone Traffic Control and Maintenance of Traffic Intermediate or Advanced Level as appropriate for the project. All flagmen shall have successfully completed the Work Zone Traffic Control and Maintenance of Traffic - Basic Level.

3.2 WEATHER PROTECTION

A. Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are secured. Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage.

B. When a warning of gale force (or higher) winds is issued, take precautions to

minimize danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Owner property. Precautions shall include, but are not limited to, closing openings; removing loose materials, tools, and equipment from exposed locations; removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work; and arranging for all dumpsters to be emptied.



3.3 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL

A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe, compliant, and proper completion of the Work.

B. Remove temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the Work will

permit, or as directed by the Owner.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01505 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT


SECTION 01505 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include other elements of the Con-tract for Construction, including the Owner/Builder Agreement or Owner/Design-Builder Agreement, the General Terms & Conditions, other sections of the Divi-sion 0 and Division 1 non-technical specifications, and the technical plans and specifications.

B. Comply with LEED requirements. See specification section 01352. C. See the Physical Plant Division Solid Waste Management website at

www.ppd.ufl.edu/grounds-refuse.html.

1.2 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

A. The builder is responsible for proper management of hazardous substances used, stored, handled, generated, or disposed of by his own construction activi-ties (e.g., excess or unwanted hazardous construction-related materials, includ-ing, but not limited to: equipment lubricants, used oil filters, aerosols, paints, acti-vators, adhesives, caulks, and other hazardous wastes). In no case shall such construction hazardous waste be commingled with demolition hazardous waste. In no case shall such construction hazardous waste be commingled with non-hazardous construction or demolition waste.

B. For renovation or demolition projects, hazardous wastes shall be segregated,

collected, labeled, and disposed of via UF Environmental Health & Safety (EH&S). These include light fixture ballasts (PCB and non-PCB), mercury ther-mostats, and batteries. See www.ehs.ufl.edu/HMM.

C. Evaluation, on-site storage, transportation, disposal and other aspects of Haz-

ardous Waste Management shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and lo-cal laws.

D. Refer to the General Terms & Conditions for requirements related to the discov-

ery of environmental contamination, including, but not limited to, Hazardous Sub-stances.

http://www.ppd.ufl.edu/grounds-refuse.html

http://www.ehs.ufl.edu/HMM



1.3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN, REPORTS, and LOGS

The University of Florida requires that its builders limit, to the extent practical, the dis-posal of construction site waste in landfills. Beyond the provisions for such work in ei-ther the basic scope of work or bid alternates, the builder shall salvage materials for re-use, resale, or recycling to the maximum extent possible. Faculty and students from the UF School of Building Construction and the College of Design, Construction, and Plan-ning may interact with the builder to facilitate, coordinate, and document such efforts and/or to conduct research. Additionally, each builder will:

A. Provide for the management of construction and demolition waste through reuse,

recycling and reduction methods. Typical designated waste streams include land clearing debris, concrete and masonry, metals and appliances, dimensional wood & lumber, wooden pallets, gypsum wallboard (unpainted), paper and card-board, packaging, and asphalt roofing shingles. Depending on the project, other large volume wastes may be included (e.g., bricks, asphalt, carpeting and pad, plastic, glass, beverage containers).

B. In accordance with Florida law, a minimum of 75% of the construction waste

stream shall be recycled. For projects seeking LEED certification, the Builder shall establish and adhere to project-specific recycling goals in accordance with LEED Credits MR 2.1 and MR 2.2.

C. Builder shall designate an on-site party responsible for implementing the plan

and instructing workers, distributing plan to site foremen and each subcontractor, including the plan in worker orientation and safety meetings, and providing site instruction and supervision on separation, handling, and recovery methods.

D. Builder shall submit a Construction Solid Waste Management Plan to the Univer-

sity Project Manager prior to mobilization. The plan shall be reviewed by the University Solid Waste Coordinator and shall include the following elements:

1. Whether construction waste will be recycled or reused by source separa-

tion, time-based separation, or commingled for delivery to an off-site sepa-ration facility.

2. The types of materials to be targeted for recycling and reuse, the projected

volumes and fate of the materials. Identify materials that are recyclable or otherwise recoverable that must be disposed of in a landfill.

3. The diversion goal indicating the percentage of waste to be diverted from

land-filling or incineration.

4. The facilities to be used, both landfills and recycling facilities, indicating which of the targeted wastes are to be received, projected volumes, and documentation of their permit status.

5. Maintenance of a Construction Waste Log (dates, facility, transporter,

weights) and a file of waste receipts for all wastes shipped off-site.



E. Submit monthly progress reports using Owner’s form (see sample Waste Report-ing Log at the end of this specification) to quantify the total amount of collected waste and the percentage recycled.

F. Maintain accurate records of the final destination of all waste, including mani-

fests, weight tickets, and receipts. Manifests shall be from recycling and disposal site operators who can legally accept the materials for the purpose of reuse, re-cycling, or disposal.


UF Waste Reporting Log

Project Name:

Paper and

Cardboard

(tons)

Metals

(tons)

Concrete,

Asphalt,

Masonry

(tons)

Comingled

Cans &

Bottles

(tons)

Land

Clearing

Debris

(tons)

Pallets

(tons)

Wood

(tons)

E-Waste

(tons)

MISC.

(tons)

white and craft metal and wire

asphalt, concrete,

brick, CMU, etc.

trees, limbs,

landscape, sod,

rocks etc

recyclable

products

controls, panels,

machinery

shingles, dry wall,

ceiling tile,

plastics etc

January 0.00 0.00

February 0.00 0.00

March 0.00 0.00

April 0.00 0.00

May 0.00 0.00

June 0.00 0.00

July 0.00 0.00

August 0.00 0.00

September 0.00 0.00

October 0.00 0.00

November 0.00 0.00

December 0.00 0.00

Total

Recycled

Tons

Total

Waste

Tons

Percent

Recycled

Total 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0!Minimum 75% required per F.S. 403.7032

Builder shall submit this form on or around the 15th of each month to PPD Grounds ( [email protected] and [email protected] ), with a copy to the UF PM.

Date:

RECYCLED WASTE

MONTH

Landfilled

Waste

(tons)

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01700 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida PROJECT CLOSEOUT


SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include other elements of the

Contract for Construction, including the Owner/Builder Agreement or Owner/Design-Builder Agreement, the General Terms & Conditions, other sections of the Division 0 and Division 1 non-technical specifications, and the technical plans and specifications.

1.2 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY

A. Prior to occupancy of a new building, the Division of Environmental Health & Safety

(EH&S) shall issue a Certificate of Occupancy. The certificate of occupancy will state the building is complete, constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications, and meets the minimum code requirements at the time of issuance of the building permit. The State Fire Marshal and other University entities must inspect and certify the building is substantially complete prior to occupancy of the structure.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Separate and distinct from completion requirements related to life safety and

building codes is the contractual obligation to achieve Substantial Completion on or before the specified date. Refer to the “Construction Inspection and Closeout” link under “Forms & Standards” on the Facilities Planning & Construction website (www.facilities.ufl.edu). Checklists and forms related to closeout shall be tailored by the Owner and design professional (A/E) to the specific needs of the project.

1.4 O&M MANUALS

A. Builder shall provide draft operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals and other documents for review by UF, the A/E, and the CxA prior to manufacturer startups, Cx Functional Performance Testing, and Owner training.

B. Builder shall tailor the O&M documents to the project, excluding or striking through

models/types not installed and otherwise including only information pertinent to the products, materials, equipment, or components actually installed. Builder shall clearly identify each item, with references to the construction documents as needed.

C. Builder shall augment O&M documents with the final approved versions of any

submittals, shop drawings, or other system/product data not already included.




D. Builder shall finalize turnover/closeout documents (including O&Ms) by addressing review comments and incorporating missing or finalized documents, test reports, and other relevant information.

E. See 1.9 below for content and format requirements.

1.5 UTILITY VIDEOS

A. When required by the technical specifications, television camera videos of underground utility lines shall be provided to the engineer of record and the Owner in MPEG or AVI format.

1.6 OWNER TRAINING

A. Training on building systems, equipment, and materials, the specific requirements for which are outlined in the technical specifications, shall be completed prior to Substantial Completion, at which point the Owner assumes the responsibility for operation and maintenance of the facility.

B. Builder shall coordinate the schedule for training with UF and provide a

comprehensive schedule for all training sessions at least 30 calendar days prior to the first scheduled session.

C. Builder shall provide – at least two weeks in advance of each scheduled session –

a syllabus, outline, or agenda for each training session for review by UF, the A/E, and (for commissioned systems) the CxA.

D. Training shall be conducted with the (draft) O&M manuals in hand – preferably in

conjunction with commissioning activities – and shall be videotaped and turned over to the Owner in MPEG format.

1.7 ATTIC STOCK

A. Coordination of the physical storage location of “attic stock” items shall be made

with UF PPD prior to Substantial Completion, and the items and quantities of same (as outlined in the technical specifications) shall be on hand as a requirement of Substantial Completion. The Builder shall develop a spreadsheet itemization of attic stock and other items to be turned over to the Owner, tracking the type and quantity of material, date(s) of turnover, and other relevant information.

1.8 ENERGY REBATE PROGRAM

A. Builder shall gather product data and other information as needed to assist Owner

with its application for energy rebates based on the materials and products installed in the facility.



1.9 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS and OTHER DELIVERABLES

A. The final version of all O&M manuals and other turnover/closeout documents shall be provided in electronic (searchable PDF) form prior to Final Completion, including a Table of Contents for each discreet manual. Provide these to UF, the A/E, and the CxA on CD-ROM or through a file-sharing platform (e.g., Sharepoint), assembled and organized in electronic folders as follows:

00 – General Information (with subfolders for pre-concealment photos and other general information such as a complete list of subcontractors with contact information, a list/inventory of attic stock, and a final list/inventory of all colors & finishes) 02000 – Site Construction 03000 – Concrete 04000 – Masonry 05000 – Metals 06000 – Wood and Plastics 07000 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (including roofing) 08000 – Doors and Windows 09000 – Finishes 10000 – Specialties (e.g., lockers, window treatment, acoustic wall panels, operable partitions, toilet accessories, fire extinguisher cabinets, mobile storage systems, etc.) 11000 – Equipment 12000 – Furnishings (e.g., fixed tables/seating, lab casework, marker boards, foot grilles, etc.) 13000 – Special Construction 14000 – Conveying Systems 21000 – Fire Protection 22000 – Plumbing 23000 – HVAC 25000 – BAS and Controls 26000 – Electrical 27000 – Telecommunications 27400 – Audio-Visual Systems 28000 – Security and Access Control 28300 – Fire Alarm

B. Other than 01000, each e-folder listed above, where applicable, shall include the

following sub-folders to consistently organize the documents and material:

1. IOM Documents and Product Data {NOTE: IOM = Installation Operations & Maintenance}

2. Shop Drawings 3. Training (including training agendas, sign-in sheets, and videos) 4. Warranty Documents 5. Other (e.g., test reports, underground utility videos, Master UL labels, meter

data sheets, 3rd party certifications or inspections)



2.0 PROJECT-SPECIFIC CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

A. The design and construction documents were produced using Building Information Modeling (BIM) software. The Builder and its subcontractors play an important role in finalizing these models to include the actual geometric location of installed systems, equipment, and materials and the actual parametric data properties of same.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 01732 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition, de-construction, and removal of building components and materials. 2. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning in-place and removing site

utilities. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Demolish: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner’s on site storage area ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Store: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner’s on site storage area ready to be reinstalled.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Builder.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.4 MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.



3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain.

B. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building. 5. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from

building site.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by building demolition operations. Submit before the Work begins.

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

E. Waste Materials Tracking and Reporting: Provide written report documenting all salvaged/ recycled and non-salvaged/ recycled waste materials. Refer to Section 01505 Construction Waste Management.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.



C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review methods and procedures for vermin eradication and cleanup. 2. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 3. Review structural load limitations of existing structures. 4. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

5. Review and finalize protection requirements. 6. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 7. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.

C. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

G. Building exclusion and rodent eradication and removal shall be completed prior to the beginning of Selective Structural Demolition operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.



B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Builder.

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Builder. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent

occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



D. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.

B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around

perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to

people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition

area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 6. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to

remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations. 7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust,

noise, and dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.

D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.



3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish indicated existing building components and materials completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain fire watch after flame cutting operations. 3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not

to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for

new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

E. Engineering Surveys: During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result from building demolition activities.

F. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.



3.6 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS

A. Remove debris from building in a controlled manner.

B. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing indicated.

1. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings. 2. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and

disconnecting devices.

3.7 REPAIRS

A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 04813 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida TERRA COTTA MASONRY


SECTION 04813 - TERRA COTTA MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. New terra cotta masonry.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference on masonry installation at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to installation of terra cotta masonry, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For product indicated.

1. For Terra Cotta include material descriptions, dimensions of individual units and profiles, and finish.

2. Include recommendations for product application and materials use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide fabrication and setting drawings prior to production of any material. Verify field dimensions.

2. Shop drawings shall show sections, dimensions and connection with other work. Drawings shall conform as nearly as practicable to the Drawings, but shall be in accordance with good Terra Cotta structural practice.

3. Anchorage of Terra Cotta units shall be coordinated with the Terra Cotta manufacturer and designed by structural engineer registered in the state of Florida. The attachment design shall withstand loads from wind, gravity, building movement, and thermally induce movement in accordance with the Code and engineering practice. Provide a complete set of scale shop drawings to be used for setting; show the piece numbering of the Terra Cotta. Indicate the size of the joints to be used for setting the various portions of the work.

hsferg

Line



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Terra Cotta Samples:

a. Preliminary Color Sample for Approval: Submit three 6” x 6” samples showing typical color range and finish for preliminary acceptance.

b. Final Color Sample after Preliminary Approval: After approval of the preliminary color sample, submit three final samples at minimum 12” x 12” which when inspected and approved become the standard for quality, color range, texture and color finish. All Terra Cotta units shall conform to the approved samples within the range, subject to normal ceramic variation. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and other product data for each manufactured product including instructions for storage, handling and use.

2. Colored Mortar: Submit sets of mortar that will be left exposed in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/4 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.

a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three samples of different mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching the existing, cleaned mortar when cured and dry.

b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and sources of colored sands from which each sample was made.

D. Material Testing: Test in accordance with ASTM C67 to determine compressive strength and absorption. Use a certified lab for testing. Manufacturer to supply current test data.

E. Field Sample for New Construction: After acceptance of sample submittal, but prior to commencement of work, prepare a working field sample of new Terra Cotta unit installation. Demonstrate all methods, materials and workmanship required for the Project. Approved field sample will serve as a standard for the balance of Terra Cotta unit installation procedures. If approved, field sample may remain as part of the finished work.


A. Terra Cotta Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years successful experience engaged in manufacturing custom architectural Terra Cotta units for building restoration purposes, of same type and of similar size, complexity, and tolerances as those required for the Work.

1. Manufacturer's field representative shall be available on site to observe installation, interpret setting drawings, advise, and assist in sorting, handling cutting, and fitting Terra Cotta pieces.

B. Installer Qualifications: A company employing mechanics with not less than 10 years’ experience in the installation of Terra Cotta including a minimum of two projects similar in scope, complexity, and tolerances as those required for the Work.

hsferg

Line



1. Provide photos of at least two projects of similar work scope. 2. Provide references with name of contact person and telephone number for the

projects.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver terra cotta units to Project site protected against impact and chipping.

B. Deliver each piece of terra cotta with code mark or setting number on unexposed face, corresponding to Shop Drawings, using nonstaining paint.

C. Deliver packaged materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products.

D. Carefully inspect Terra Cotta upon receipt. Notify the manufacturer of any non-conformity.

1. If any pieces of Terra Cotta are damaged in transit, the manufacturer shall be immediately notified in writing and proceed with the remaking of the pieces.

E. Units shall remain in their original packing material until ready for use. Store and protect units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

F. Handle Terra Cotta units to prevent overstressing, chipping, defacement, and other damage.

G. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit repair work to be performed according to product manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.

B. Hot-and-Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 530.1.

C. For manufactured repair materials, perform work within the environmental limits set by each manufacturer.

1.7 TERRA COTTA MOLDS

A. On completion of the manufacturing of units, deliver one unused mold of each shape and size of unit delivered to Project site. Deliver to a location and at a time determined by Owner, to become property of Owner.

B. Have molds delivered carefully packed; protected from dirt, moisture, and breakage; so as to arrive in usable, undamaged condition and enable long-term storage and possible future use.

hsferg

Line



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repairing historic masonry (terra cotta, cement, sand, etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 TERRA COTTA AND ACCESSORIES

A. Date Identification for Terra Cotta Units: Emboss in the clay body on a concealed, interior surface of each unit in easily read characters the date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name may also be embossed.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Conform to the following physical requirements in accordance with ASTM Specifications:

a. Test Average (based on 10 samples):

1) Compressive Strength: 6000 psi.

a) Method: ASTM C67 b) Criteria: ASTM C126

2) Absorption (5 hour boil) : 11.5%; ASTM C67 3) Absorption (24 hour soak): 7.5%; ASTM C67 4) Saturation Coefficient : 0.69; ASTM C67

5) Craze Resistance: ASTM C126

6) Glaze Absorption: 0.15%; ASTM C67 7) Freeze/Thaw Resistance: ASTM C67 8) Cycles Without Degradation: 300

2. Face Dimension Tolerances: The face dimensions (length and width) of sized/cut Terra Cotta units shall not vary more than 1/16 inch over or under the dimensions specified on the shop drawings. Exposed face shall not vary from shop drawing dimensions by more than 1/8 inch plus or minus per linear foot.

3. Warpage Tolerances: The exposed face of hand-made Terra Cotta shall not vary from a true plane more than the existing original material. Warpage tolerances of exposed faces of machine extruded ceramic veneer shall not vary from a true plane by more than 0.005 inch per inch of length.

4. Finished faces that will be exposed when installed shall be free from chips, blisters or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished wall when viewed from a normal viewing distance or of a minimum of 15 feet.

C. Manufacture all pieces for particular installation conditions to minimize any cutting in the field. Adjust individual pieces to accommodate setting sequence.

hsferg

Line



D. Adjust Terra Cotta to accommodate construction.

1. Make provisions for expansion joints to prevent the development of disruptive stresses cause by deflection, wind pressure, temperature changes, settlement and like forces.

2. Provide flashing where required. 3. Provide 300 Series stainless steel fasteners and anchors.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar: ASTM C270.

B. Grout: ASTM C476.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II; white or gray or both where required for color matching of mortar.

1. Provide low-alkali cement according to ASTM C 150.

D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Mortar Sand: Clean, washed natural or manufactured silica sand grated according to ASTM C144, shall contain no more than 50 parts per million of chloride ions, and shall be free or organic contaminants.

1. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.

2. Colored Mortar: Provide natural sand or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

3. For exposed mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.

F. Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979, compounded for use in mortar mixes, and having a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.

G. Water: Potable.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Terra Cotta Anchors: Type and size required for installation. Fabricate anchors from Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of terra cotta units, less the required depth of pointing materials unless removed before pointing.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. All joints shall be straight and true. All Terra Cotta shall be laid out at the factory to check for uniformity of joint widths and over-all dimensions.

hsferg

Line



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.

B. Clean new unit prior to setting, leaving edges and surfaces free of dirt or foreign material. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces.

1. Prepare units, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, prior to installation.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide loose anchors, such as clamps, hangers, clips, straps, and pins.

B. Exercise proper care to prevent the corrosion of all steel supports, ties, etc.

C. Maintain uniform joint widths to match existing unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

D. Erection Tolerances:

1. Variation from Plumb: In accordance with ACI 530.1 current edition. 2. Variation from Level: In accordance with ACI 530.1 current edition. 3. Variation from True Plane: In accordance with ACI 530.1 current edition.

E. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions, including voids, cracks, bulges, loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

3.4 MIXING, MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made setting beds and grout:

1. Setting Mortar: Use Type N mortar; in accordance with ASTM C270 with the following material mix proportion by volume:

a. Portland Cement: 1 part b. Hydrated Lime: 1 part c. Sand: 6 parts

2. Pointing Mortar: Use setting mortar for new construction.

hsferg

Line



B. Color of mortar shall match building’s existing cleaned mortar unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

1. Use colored sand to obtain desired mortar color.

3.5 POINT JOINTS

A. Pointing

1. Refer to ACI 530.1 current edition for Hot and Cold Weather Construction. 2. Wet joint thoroughly and repeatedly prior to pointing and between pointing lifts.

Allow water to soak in so that no freestanding water is visible. 3. Point in two lifts; pack joints to within 3/8 inch of surface on first lift, allow first lift

to set prior to pointing second lift. 4. As soon as mortar has taken its initial set, tool joint surfaces to match existing

sound mortar joint surfaces. Do not allow mortar to extend over edges of Terra Cotta units.

5. After initial 24 hour set, moisten until cured. Allow mortar to cure completely prior to cleaning operations, minimum 30 days.

3.6 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Obtain Architect and Owner concurrence prior to job site cutting and fitting any item not indicated on drawing. Cutting and fitting of the Terra Cotta that may be required shall be done by the contractor setting Terra Cotta. Do not impair appearance or strength of Terra Cotta.

B. All necessary face cutting of Terra Cotta at the job site shall be done with a saw using a water-cooled diamond blade. Face cutting shall not disturb the glaze.

3.7 FINAL CLEANING

A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied by low-pressure spray.

1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces.

C. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.

hsferg

Line



3.8 ACCEPTANCE

A. The completed installation shall have the acceptance of the Architect and Owner. Remove and replace units that are chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged which do not conform to the Specification Requirements and as directed by the Architect and Owner.

3.9 MASONRY-WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property.

B. Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


hsferg

Line



SECTION 04818 - TERRA COTTA MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. New terra cotta masonry.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference on masonry installation at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to installation of terra cotta masonry, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For product indicated.

1. For Terra Cotta include material descriptions, dimensions of individual units and profiles, and finish.

2. Include recommendations for product application and materials use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide fabrication and setting drawings prior to production of any material. Verify field dimensions.

2. Shop drawings shall show sections, dimensions and connection with other work. Drawings shall conform as nearly as practicable to the Drawings, but shall be in accordance with good Terra Cotta structural practice.

3. Anchorage of Terra Cotta units shall be coordinated with the Terra Cotta manufacturer and designed by structural engineer registered in the state of Florida. The attachment design shall withstand loads from wind, gravity, building movement, and thermally induce movement in accordance with the Code and engineering practice. Provide a complete set of scale shop drawings to be used for setting; show the piece numbering of the Terra Cotta. Indicate the size of the joints to be used for setting the various portions of the work.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Terra Cotta Samples:

a. Preliminary Color Sample for Approval: Submit three 6” x 6” samples showing typical color range and finish for preliminary acceptance.

b. Final Color Sample after Preliminary Approval: After approval of the preliminary color sample, submit three final samples at minimum 12” x 12” which when inspected and approved become the standard for quality, color range, texture and color finish. All Terra Cotta units shall conform to the approved samples within the range, subject to normal ceramic variation. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and other product data for each manufactured product including instructions for storage, handling and use.

2. Colored Mortar: Submit sets of mortar that will be left exposed in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/4 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.

a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three samples of different mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching the existing, cleaned mortar when cured and dry.

b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and sources of colored sands from which each sample was made.

D. Material Testing: Test in accordance with ASTM C67 to determine compressive strength and absorption. Use a certified lab for testing. Manufacturer to supply current test data.

E. Field Sample for New Construction: After acceptance of sample submittal, but prior to commencement of work, prepare a working field sample of new Terra Cotta unit installation. Demonstrate all methods, materials and workmanship required for the Project. Approved field sample will serve as a standard for the balance of Terra Cotta unit installation procedures. If approved, field sample may remain as part of the finished work.


A. Terra Cotta Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years successful experience engaged in manufacturing custom architectural Terra Cotta units for building restoration purposes, of same type and of similar size, complexity, and tolerances as those required for the Work.


B. Installer Qualifications: A company employing mechanics with not less than 10 years’ experience in the installation of Terra Cotta including a minimum of two projects similar in scope, complexity, and tolerances as those required for the Work.



1. Provide photos of at least two projects of similar work scope. 2. Provide references with name of contact person and telephone number for the

projects.


A. Deliver terra cotta units to Project site protected against impact and chipping.

B. Deliver each piece of terra cotta with code mark or setting number on unexposed face, corresponding to Shop Drawings, using nonstaining paint.
















PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repairing historic masonry (terra cotta, cement, sand, etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 TERRA COTTA AND ACCESSORIES

A. Date Identification for Terra Cotta Units: Emboss in the clay body on a concealed, interior surface of each unit in easily read characters the date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name may also be embossed.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Conform to the following physical requirements in accordance with ASTM Specifications:

a. Test Average (based on 10 samples):

1) Compressive Strength: 6000 psi.

a) Method: ASTM C67 b) Criteria: ASTM C126

2) Absorption (5 hour boil) : 11.5%; ASTM C67 3) Absorption (24 hour soak): 7.5%; ASTM C67 4) Saturation Coefficient : 0.69; ASTM C67

5) Craze Resistance: ASTM C126

6) Glaze Absorption: 0.15%; ASTM C67 7) Freeze/Thaw Resistance: ASTM C67 8) Cycles Without Degradation: 300

2. Face Dimension Tolerances: The face dimensions (length and width) of sized/cut Terra Cotta units shall not vary more than 1/16 inch over or under the dimensions specified on the shop drawings. Exposed face shall not vary from shop drawing dimensions by more than 1/8 inch plus or minus per linear foot.

3. Warpage Tolerances: The exposed face of hand-made Terra Cotta shall not vary from a true plane more than the existing original material. Warpage tolerances of exposed faces of machine extruded ceramic veneer shall not vary from a true plane by more than 0.005 inch per inch of length.

4. Finished faces that will be exposed when installed shall be free from chips, blisters or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished wall when viewed from a normal viewing distance or of a minimum of 15 feet.

C. Manufacture all pieces for particular installation conditions to minimize any cutting in the field. Adjust individual pieces to accommodate setting sequence.



D. Adjust Terra Cotta to accommodate construction.

1. Make provisions for expansion joints to prevent the development of disruptive stresses cause by deflection, wind pressure, temperature changes, settlement and like forces.

2. Provide flashing where required. 3. Provide 300 Series stainless steel fasteners and anchors.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar: ASTM C270.

B. Grout: ASTM C476.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II; white or gray or both where required for color matching of mortar.

1. Provide low-alkali cement according to ASTM C 150.

D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Mortar Sand: Clean, washed natural or manufactured silica sand grated according to ASTM C144, shall contain no more than 50 parts per million of chloride ions, and shall be free or organic contaminants.


2. Colored Mortar: Provide natural sand or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.



G. Water: Potable.


A. Terra Cotta Anchors: Type and size required for installation. Fabricate anchors from Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of terra cotta units, less the required depth of pointing materials unless removed before pointing.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. All joints shall be straight and true. All Terra Cotta shall be laid out at the factory to check for uniformity of joint widths and over-all dimensions.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.

B. Clean new unit prior to setting, leaving edges and surfaces free of dirt or foreign material. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces.

1. Prepare units, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, prior to installation.

3.2 PROTECTION


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide loose anchors, such as clamps, hangers, clips, straps, and pins.

B. Exercise proper care to prevent the corrosion of all steel supports, ties, etc.

C. Maintain uniform joint widths to match existing unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

D. Erection Tolerances:

1. Variation from Plumb: In accordance with ACI 530.1 current edition. 2. Variation from Level: In accordance with ACI 530.1 current edition. 3. Variation from True Plane: In accordance with ACI 530.1 current edition.

E. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions, including voids, cracks, bulges, loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

3.4 MIXING, MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made setting beds and grout:

1. Setting Mortar: Use Type N mortar; in accordance with ASTM C270 with the following material mix proportion by volume:

a. Portland Cement: 1 part b. Hydrated Lime: 1 part c. Sand: 6 parts

2. Pointing Mortar: Use setting mortar for new construction.



B. Color of mortar shall match building’s existing cleaned mortar unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

1. Use colored sand to obtain desired mortar color.

3.5 POINT JOINTS

A. Pointing

1. Refer to ACI 530.1 current edition for Hot and Cold Weather Construction. 2. Wet joint thoroughly and repeatedly prior to pointing and between pointing lifts.

Allow water to soak in so that no freestanding water is visible. 3. Point in two lifts; pack joints to within 3/8 inch of surface on first lift, allow first lift

to set prior to pointing second lift. 4. As soon as mortar has taken its initial set, tool joint surfaces to match existing

sound mortar joint surfaces. Do not allow mortar to extend over edges of Terra Cotta units.

5. After initial 24 hour set, moisten until cured. Allow mortar to cure completely prior to cleaning operations, minimum 30 days.

3.6 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Obtain Architect and Owner concurrence prior to job site cutting and fitting any item not indicated on drawing. Cutting and fitting of the Terra Cotta that may be required shall be done by the contractor setting Terra Cotta. Do not impair appearance or strength of Terra Cotta.

B. All necessary face cutting of Terra Cotta at the job site shall be done with a saw using a water-cooled diamond blade. Face cutting shall not disturb the glaze.

3.7 FINAL CLEANING



B. Clean adjacent surfaces.

C. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.



3.8 ACCEPTANCE

A. The completed installation shall have the acceptance of the Architect and Owner. Remove and replace units that are chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged which do not conform to the Specification Requirements and as directed by the Architect and Owner.





UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 04917 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida HISTORIC TERRA COTTA UNIT MASONRY REPAIR


SECTION 04917 - HISTORIC TERRA COTTA UNIT MASONRY REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes historic treatment work consisting of repairing historic Terra Cotta masonry as follows:

1. Site investigation to determine restoration requirements. 2. Cleaning existing Terra Cotta. 3. Repairing Terra Cotta unit masonry, including replacing units. 4. Repointing existing Terra Cotta unit masonry. 5. Painting steel uncovered during the work. 6. Design and fabrication of Terra Cotta unit masonry to match existing. 7. Installation of Terra Cotta unit masonry on existing building to replace damaged

Terra Cotta.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference on historic masonry repair and repointing at Project site.

1. Review minutes of Preliminary Historic Treatment Conference that pertain to masonry historic treatment and repair.

2. Review methods and procedures related to repairing historic Terra Cotta masonry, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Historic treatment specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


c. Quality-control program. d. Terra Cotta historic treatment program.

1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Work Sequence: Perform masonry historic treatment work in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this and other Sections:

1. Remove plant growth. 2. Inspect masonry for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the

intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 3. Clean masonry.



4. Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent to masonry repairs along joints.

5. Repair Terra Cotta masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. If required, repair backup masonry.

6. Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed. 7. Point mortar joints. 8. After repairs and repointing have been completed and cured, perform a final

cleaning to remove residues from this work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For products required.

1. Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include recommendations for product application and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of Terra Cotta units.

1. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within two days of taking photographs.

a. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. b. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same

aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

c. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:

1) Name of Project. 2) Name and contact information for photographer. 3) Name of Architect. 4) Name of Contractor. 5) Date photograph was taken. 6) Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by

compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 7) Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

2. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings in digital video disc format acceptable to Architect.

a. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:

1) Name of Project. 2) Name and address of photographer. 3) Name of Architect. 4) Name of Contractor. 5) Date video recording was recorded.



6) Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

7) Weather conditions at time of recording.

C. Material Testing – Terra Cotta Units: Test in accordance with ASTM C67 to determine compressive strength and absorption. Use a certified lab for testing. Manufacturer shall provide current test data.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of masonry repair work on the structure.

2. Shop drawings shall show sections, dimensions and connection with other work. Drawings shall conform as nearly as practicable to the Architect’s drawings and in accordance with good Terra Cotta structural practice.

3. Show full-size patterns with complete dimensions for new Terra Cotta units and their jointing, showing relationship of existing units to new units.

4. Indicate setting number of each new Terra Cotta unit and its location on the structure in annotated plans and elevations.

5. Terra Cotta unit anchorage shall be designed by a Structural Engineer registered in the state of Florida. Show replacement and repair anchors. Include details of anchors within individual Terra Cotta units, with locations of anchors and dimensions of holes and recesses in units required for anchors.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Mortar: Submit sets of mortar that will be left exposed in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/4 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.

a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching the existing, cleaned mortar when cured and dry.

b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and sources of colored sands from which each Sample was made.

2. Patching Compound: Submit sets of patching compound Samples in the form of plugs (patches in drilled holes) in sample units of masonry representative of the range of masonry colors on the building.

a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different mixes of patching compound that match the variations in existing masonry when cured and dry.

3. Terra Cotta Glaze Replacement: Submit sets of Terra Cotta glaze replacement Samples applied to Terra Cotta shingle, with glaze colors representative of the range of glaze colors on the building.

a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different formulas that match the variations in existing Terra Cotta glazes.



4. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

F. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Each type of Terra Cotta composition and color to be used for replacing existing units. Include sets of Samples to show the full range of color and texture to be expected.

a. Patterns for Terra Cotta: Before manufacturing Terra Cotta units, submit the actual patterns from which molds will be made for casting new units. Package and ship to prevent loss or damage, or make patterns available for inspection by Architect at fabrication plant.

b. Terra Cotta Units: Provide one of each shape, color, and texture of unit, suitable and ready for installation.

2. Each type of patching compound in the form of briquettes, at least 3 inches long by 1-1/2 inches wide. Document each Sample with manufacturer and stock number or other information necessary to order additional material.

3. Each color of Terra Cotta glaze replacement applied to briquettes, at least 3 inches long by 1-1/2 inches wide. Document each Sample with manufacturer and stock number or other information necessary to order additional material.

4. Accessories: Each type of anchor, accessory, and miscellaneous support.

G. Qualification Data: For historic treatment specialists and Terra Cotta manufacturer.

H. Preconstruction Test Reports: For existing Terra Cotta units and mortar and replacement Terra Cotta units.

I. Quality-control program.

J. Terra Cotta historic treatment program.


A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: A qualified historic Terra Cotta repair specialist with a minimum of 10 years’ experience in historic treatment of building with similar requirements as those required for the Work.

1. Specialist shall inspect and identify all locations of Terra Cotta repair and/or replacement.

2. Specialist shall describe repair and replacement methods relative to spalling, cracking, breaking, chipping and other identified failures.



B. Terra Cotta Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years successful experience engaged in manufacturing custom architectural Terra Cotta units for building restoration purposes, of same type and of similar size, complexity, and tolerances as those required for the Work.


C. Installer Qualifications: A company employing mechanics with not less than 10 years’ experience in historical restoration of Terra Cotta and installation of new Terra Cotta units for building restoration purposes including a minimum of two projects similar in scope, complexity, and tolerances as those required for the Work.

1. Provide photos of at least two projects of similar Work scope. 2. Provide references with name of contact person and telephone number for the

projects.

D. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods and use materials and tools without damaging masonry. Include provisions for supervising worker performance and preventing damage.

E. Terra Cotta Historic Treatment Program: Prepare a written, detailed description of materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of historic treatment work, including protection of surrounding materials and Project site.

1. Include methods for keeping exposed mortar damp during curing period. 2. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase

of historic treatment work, add to the quality-control program a written description of such materials and methods, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects, and demonstrations to show their effectiveness for this Project.

F. Mockups: Prepare mockups of historic treatment on existing surfaces as directed by the Architect to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Demonstrate all methods, materials and workmanship required for the Project.

1. Terra Cotta Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of Terra Cotta material and assembly indicated to have repair work performed. Construct sample areas in locations in existing walls where directed by Architect. Demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work. Include the following as a minimum:

a. Replacement: Two Terra Cotta units replaced. b. Patching: After identification of damaged areas by the Historic Treatment

Specialists the Architect will identify specific locations where Terra Cotta is to be patched, so as to leave no evidence of repair.



2. Approved mockup will serve as a standard for the balance of terra cotta unit installation procedures. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on Terra Cotta units as follows:

1. Specimens: Provide test specimens representative of proposed materials and existing construction.

2. Existing Mortar: Test according to ASTM C1324. Carefully remove existing mortar from within joints at five locations designated by Architect or testing service.

3. Temporary Patch: As directed by Architect, provide temporary materials followed by permanent repairs at locations from which existing samples were taken.


A. Deliver replacement Terra Cotta units to Project site protected against impact and chipping.

B. Deliver each piece of Terra Cotta with code mark or setting number on unexposed face, corresponding to Shop Drawings, using non-staining paint.
















PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repairing historic masonry (Terra Cotta, cement, sand, etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 MASONRY MATERIALS

A. Glazed Terra Cotta: Terra Cotta units shall consist of modular, manufactured, fired and glazed clay pieces attached to structural substrate.

B. Provide new Terra Cotta units to match existing Terra Cotta units in physical properties, color, gloss, surface texture, profile, dimensions, and composition of surface glaze.

1. Physical Properties: Provide units with tested physical properties within 10 percent of those determined from preconstruction testing of selected existing units.

2. Date Identification: Emboss in the clay body on a concealed, interior surface of each unit in easily read characters the date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name may also be embossed.

C. Pieces shall be structurally sound with adequate provision for anchorage and setting:



2.3 HISTORIC MORTAR

A. Historic Mortar: Comply with ASTM C1713 requirements.

2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II; white or gray or both where required for color matching of mortar.

1. Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Factory-Prepared Lime Putty: ASTM C 1489.

D. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime.

E. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144 unless otherwise indicated.


2. Colored Mortar: Provide natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.



G. Water: Potable.

2.5 MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Terra Cotta Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured for patching Terra Cotta masonry.

1. Use formulation that is vapor and water permeable (equal to or more than the masonry unit), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than the Terra Cotta units being repaired, and develops high bond strength to all types of masonry.

2. Use formulation having working qualities and retardation control to permit forming and sculpturing where necessary.

3. Formulate patching compound used for patching Terra Cotta in colors and textures to match each unit being patched. Provide sufficient number of colors to enable matching the color, texture, and variation of each unit.



B. Terra Cotta Glaze Replacement: A high-solids, non-yellowing, fade-resistant, waterborne acrylic latex, polyurethane, or epoxy coating intended for exterior use as Terra Cotta glaze replacement. Product shall be custom mixed by manufacturer to match color and gloss of existing Terra Cotta glaze.


A. Terra Cotta Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing, formed metal anchors in size and type. Fabricate anchors from Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, non-staining to masonry, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of Terra Cotta units, less the required depth of pointing materials unless removed before pointing.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material; compatible with mortar, joint primers, sealants, and surfaces adjacent to joints; and that easily comes off entirely, including adhesive.

D. Other Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval of a mockup:

1. Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved. 2. Minimal possibility of damaging exposed surfaces. 3. Consistency of each application. 4. Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance.

5. Do not use products or tools that could do the following:

a. Remove, alter, or harm the present condition or future preservation of existing surfaces, including surrounding surfaces not in Contract.

b. Leave residue on surfaces.

2.7 MORTAR MIXES

A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer.

B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval.

1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not add pigment exceeding 10 percent by weight of the cementitious or binder materials, except for carbon black, which is limited to 2 percent, unless otherwise demonstrated by a satisfactory history of performance.

C. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.



D. Mixes: Mix mortar materials in proportions recommended by the Historic Treatment Specialist.

2.8 FABRICATION OF NEW TERRA COTTA UNITS

A. General: Fabricate Terra Cotta pieces in accordance with approved shop and setting drawings.

1. Duplicate existing Terra Cotta pieces based on illustrative samples from existing building.

2. Produce molds for forming Terra Cotta pieces. Allow for clay shrinkage resulting from drying and firing.

3. Form clay pieces by hand pressing, ram pressing, or extruding as determined by manufacturer as best method for shapes, sizes, and complexity of Terra Cotta . Hand finish pieces as required to produce high quality component.

4. Dry pieces 3 to 14 days using regulated temperature and humidity. 5. After fabrication and prior to packing for shipment, carefully inspect Terra Cotta

pieces for chips, cracks, and other defects. Verify dimensions comply with shop drawing dimensions and finishes match approved samples.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Verify pieces meet fabrication tolerances:

1. Warpage for extruded Terra Cotta veneer: 0.005 inch per inch length maximum

variation from true plane. 2. Tolerance for handmade Terra Cotta pieces: 1/8 inch maximum variation from

shop drawing dimensions.

C. Correct deficiencies.

2.9 FINISH OF NEW TERRA COTTA UNITS

A. Finish: Terra Cotta pieces shall be glazed.

1. Glaze, glaze color and texture to match finish of existing Terra Cotta.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION


1. Cover sills, ledges, and other projecting items to protect them from mortar droppings.

2. Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering.

3. Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.



B. Remove gutters and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to immediate work area, and store during masonry repair work. Reinstall when repairs are complete.

1. Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.

3.2 MASONRY REPAIR, GENERAL

A. Repair Appearance Standard: Repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 10 feet away by Architect.

B. Terra Cotta Unit Repair: Were identified by the Historic Treatment Specialist repair Terra Cotta units in accordance with written instructions.

3.3 TERRA COTTA REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. At locations indicated and identified by the Architect, remove Terra Cotta units that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Carefully remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units.

B. Support and protect remaining masonry that was supported by removed units.

C. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.

D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions, including voids, cracks, bulges, loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

E. Clean masonry surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for Terra Cotta replacement.

F. Method of attachment of Terra Cotta shall be designed to adequately resist wind pressure, uplift, and other loads for project location.

G. Install replacement units to match existing.

1. Do not cut or grind glazed Terra Cotta. 2. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints. 3. Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints.

H. Set replacement units in a full bed of rebuilding (setting) mortar. Replace existing, formed metal anchors with new Terra Cotta anchors matching existing configuration.

1. Embed anchors in mortar, and fill voids behind units with mortar. 2. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding

existing Terra Cotta.



3. Rake out mortar used for setting Terra Cotta before mortar sets according to Section 040327 "Historic Terra Cotta Unit Masonry Repointing." Point at same time as repointing of surrounding area.

4. When mortar is sufficiently hard to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering with pointing of joints.

I. Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours, including weekends and holidays.

1. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.

J. Acceptance: The completed installation shall be acceptable to the Owner. Remove and replace units that are chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged which do not conform to the Specification requirements.

3.4 BACKUP MASONRY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. Where backup masonry is fractured or unstable and at locations indicated, remove mortar and masonry units that are broken or deteriorated and rebuild with whole, new brick or whole salvaged units. Carefully remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units.

B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area.

C. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, anchors, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.

D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions, including voids, cracks, bulges, loose units beyond the removal area, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

E. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible.

1. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water.

2. Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.

3. Store brick for reuse. Store off ground, on skids, and protected from weather. 4. Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner unless otherwise indicated.

F. Clean masonry surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for brick replacement.

G. Replace removed damaged brick with salvaged backup brick in good condition, where possible, or with new building brick matching existing backup brick. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size.



H. Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

I. Lay replacement brick with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints.

J. Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours, including weekends and holidays.

1. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.

3.5 TERRA COTTA PATCHING

A. Patch the following Terra Cotta units unless another type of repair or replacement is indicated:

1. Units indicated to be patched. 2. Units with holes. 3. Units with chipped edges or corners. Patch chipped edges or corners measuring

more than 3/4 inch in least dimension. 4. Units with small areas of deep deterioration. Patch deep deteriorations

measuring more than 3/4 inch in least dimension and more than 1/4 inch deep.

B. Remove and replace existing patches unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect.

C. Patching Terra Cotta: As directed by the Historic Treatment Specialist and as follows.

1. Remove deteriorated material as determined by sounding gently with a small hammer. Carefully remove additional material so patch does not have feathered edges but has square or slightly undercut edges on area to be patched and is at least 1/4 inch thick, but not less than recommended in writing by patching compound manufacturer.

2. Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch extends to edge of unit.

3. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each unit being patched. Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match.

4. Rinse surface to be patched and leave damp, but without standing water. 5. Brush-coat surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to

manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Place patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by patching

compound manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch or more than 2 inches thick. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer.

7. Do not apply patching compound over mortar joints. If patching compound bridges mortar joints, cut out joints after patching compound hardens.



8. Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture, details, and surrounding surface plane or contour of Terra Cotta. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined by testing, to best match existing Terra Cotta.

9. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set. 10. After final layer of patching compound has cured, apply Terra Cotta glaze

replacement according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply two or more coats, as needed, to match glaze of adjacent Terra Cotta units.

3.6 TERRA COTTA GLAZE REPAIR

A. Repair the glaze on the following Terra Cotta units that are otherwise sound unless another type of repair or replacement is indicated:

1. Units indicated to have glaze repaired. 2. Units with abraded or chipped glaze. 3. Units with spots or areas of shallow deterioration greater than glaze thickness

and less up to 1/16 inch deep.

B. Remove and replace discolored or mismatched glaze repairs unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect.

C. Application: After other repairs have cured, apply Terra Cotta glaze replacement according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply two or more coats, as needed, to match glaze of adjacent Terra Cotta units. Do not apply glaze to joint surfaces between units or within joints that will be mortared or sealed.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION



B. Remove excess mortar from all surrounding surfaces upon completion of setting to prevent stains.

C. Clean adjacent non-masonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.

D. Clean mortar and debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts.

E. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.

F. Protect and do not damage existing adjacent work to remain.



G. Protect new work from damage or staining due to construction operations.

H. On completion of work remove all temporary protection.





UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 08592 University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida WINDOW REPLACEMENT


SECTION 08592 – WINDOW REPLACEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Replacing existing windows with new windows to match original 1910 profile.

1.2 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. Exterior windows shall meet the requirements of the Florida Building Code.

1. Provide product evaluations and installation requirements indicating compliance with Code requirements.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Building Code Requirements: Provide windows that comply with the requirements of the Florida Building Code.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide windows capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

C. Glazing Systems: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

D. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference on historic treatment of steel windows at Project site.

1. Review minutes of Preliminary Historic Treatment Conference that pertain to replacement of existing windows.



1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Perform work in the following sequence:

1. Label each existing window frame with permanent opening-identification number. 2. Remove window and tag with opening-identification numbers. 3. Remove caulking and sealant residue from perimeter substrates. 4. Install temporary protection and security at window openings.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Approval: Submit current Product Approval documentation in accordance with the Florida Building Code.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare engineering data, including Shop Drawings, based on engineering analysis of assemblies indicated for this Project as prepared by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida.

C. Product Data: For windows.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows.

D. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and sections showing locations and extent of repair and replacement work, with enlarged details indicating materials, profiles, connections, reinforcing and accessory items. Include field-verified dimensions and the following:

1. Schedule of windows being replaced, using same reference number for openings as those on Contract Drawings.

2. Full-size shapes and profiles with complete dimensions for replacement windows showing relationship of existing components to new components.

3. Details of temporary protection and security at window openings. 4. Identification of each new unit and its corresponding window locations in the

building on annotated plans and elevations. 5. Provisions for sealant joints and flashing as required for location.

E. Samples: For exposed finish.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. 2. Provide 12-inch-long, full-size frame mullion sections with shop-applied finish. 3. Provide glass samples.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years’ experience in the fabrication of custom historic aluminum windows that meet or exceed requirements indicated.

B. Mockups – for Selection of Manufacturer: Each manufacturer shall submit, for Architect and Owner’s approval, one full-size window unit to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and fabrication.

C. Mockups – Site Installation: Install one complete window mockup to demonstrate aesthetic effects of replacement windows and to set quality standards for materials and execution, and for fabrication and installation.

1. Locate mockup where directed by Architect. 2. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Pack, deliver, and store window units in suitable packs, heavy-duty cartons, or wooden crates; surround with sufficient packing material to ensure that products will not be deformed, broken, or otherwise damaged.

B. Store window units inside a well-ventilated area and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity, and where environmental conditions comply with manufacturer's requirements

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPLICATED ALUMINUM WINDOW UNITS

A. Replicated Aluminum Windows: Thermally broken fixed aluminum units matching the original 1910 window profile custom fabricated with non-operational hardware.

1. Manufacturers: Provide a list of at least 3 manufacturers meeting quality assurance requirements.

2. Date Identification: Emboss on a concealed surface of each replaced window frame in easily read characters, the year the window was made. Manufacturer's name may also be embossed.



B. Glass: Low-E, 1-inch thick insulated glass, fully tempered exterior and interior glass lites.

1. Glass Performance:

a. U-Value: 0.26 b. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 c. SHGC: 0.27 d. Glass Color: Match Architect’s sample.

C. Glazing Systems: Manufacturer’s standard for windows indicated.

1. Primers and Cleaners for Glazing: As recommended in writing by glazing material manufacturer.

D. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide extruded-aluminum divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite.

1. Type: Permanently located at interior and exterior and between insulating-glass lites.

2. Pattern: As indicated. 3. Profile: As indicated.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Use fastener metals that are noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined.

1. Use concealed fasteners to attach items to other work. 2. For fastening metals, use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal.

B. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with requirements in ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (Severe) service condition.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Complete fabrication, assembly, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.



2.4 WINDOW FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to match Architect’s sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT

A. General: Install windows in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

1. Install units, accessories, and other components required for a complete and weather-tight installation.

2. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

B. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

C. Anchor Concealment: Fill screw head depressions flush and smooth with paintable putty after window installation, spot prime, and paint.

D. Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after historic treatment of steel windows. Avoid damage to coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing and repair materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.


UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15005University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida MECHANICAL GENERAL

M&A 15024

SECTION 15005/MECHANICAL GENERAL

1 GENERAL

1.1 The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materialsand performing all operations necessary for the installation of the mechanical work asherein called for and shown on the drawings.

1.2 Related Documents:

1.2.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2.2 This is a Basic Mechanical Requirements Section. Provisions of this section apply towork of all Division 15 sections.

1.2.3 Review all other contract documents to be aware of conditions affecting work herein.

1.2.4 Definitions:

1.2.4.1 Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

1.2.4.2 Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements.

1.2.4.3 Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection,placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning,and similar requirements.

1.3 Permits and Fees: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, meters, and inspectionsrequired for his work. Owner shall pay all fees and charges incidental thereto.

1.4 Verification of Owner's Data: Prior to commencing any work the Contractor shall satisfyhimself as to the accuracy of all data as indicated in these plans and specificationsand/or as provided by the Owner. Should the Contractor discover any inaccuracies,errors, or omissions in the data, he shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer inorder that proper adjustments can be anticipated and ordered. Commencement by theContractor of any work shall be held as an acceptance of the data by him after whichtime the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting from alleged errors,omissions or inaccuracies of the said data.

1.5 Delivery and Storage of Materials: Materials delivered to site shall be inspected fordamage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. All material shall be storedto provide protection from the weather and accidental damage.

1.6 Extent of work is indicated by the drawings, schedules, and the requirements of thespecifications. Singular references shall not be constructed as requiring only one deviceif multiple devices are shown on the drawings or are required for proper systemoperation.

#1520203SCHENKEL SHULTZ / RAMSA ERP #1

15005-1


M&A 15024

1.7 Field Measurements and Coordination:

1.7.1 The intent of the drawings and specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactoryinstallation. Separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve theContractor from full compliance of work indicated on any of the drawings or in anysection of the specifications. Report conflicts prior to start of work.

1.7.2 Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with othertrades' work. Make use of all contract documents and approved shop drawings to verifyexact dimension and locations.

1.7.3 Coordinate work in this division in proper sequence to insure that the total work iscompleted within contract time schedule and with a minimum cutting and patching.

1.7.4 Locate all apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install to exact height andlocations when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown only onmechanical drawings, be guided by architectural details and conditions existing at joband correlate this work with that of others.

1.7.5 Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions, and retain clearance,headroom, openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without writtenapproval from Engineer or Architect.

1.7.6 Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping, and premises. Compare drawings withexisting conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. It shall be the Contractor'sresponsibility to properly coordinate the work and to identify problems in a timely manner. Written instructions will be issued to resolve discrepancies.

1.7.7 Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets andfittings or to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Studycarefully the sizes and locations of structural members, wall and partition locations,trusses, and room dimensions and take actual measurements on the job. Locate piping,ductwork, equipment and accessories with sufficient space for installing and servicing.Contractor is responsible for accuracy of his measurements and for coordination with alltrades. Contractor shall not order materials or perform work without such verification. Noextra compensation will be allowed because field measurements vary from thedimensions on the drawings. If field measurements show that equipment or piping willnot fit, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. Remove and relocate, withoutadditional compensation, any item that is installed and is later found to encroach onspace assigned to another use.

1.8 Guarantee:

1.8.1 The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1)year from Substantial Completion, or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier. Contractor shall make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments toand replacement of defective items without expense to the Owner.


15005-2


M&A 15024

1.8.2 Owner reserves right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment inoperation without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond nor relieving Contractor of hisresponsibilities during guarantee period.

1.9 Approval Submittals:

1.9.1 When approved, the submittal control log and submittals shall be an addition to thespecifications herewith, and shall be of equal force in that no deviation will be permittedexcept with the approval of the Architect/Engineer.

1.9.1.1 Shop drawings, product literature, and other approval submittals will only be reviewed ifthey are submitted in full accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division 1 Specification Section 01300 and the following.

1.9.1.1.1 Submittals shall be properly organized in accordance with the approved submittal controllog.

1.9.1.1.2 Submittals shall not include items from more than one specification section in the samesubmittal package unless approved in the submittal control log.

1.9.1.1.3 Submittals shall be properly identified by a cover sheet showing the project name,Architect and Engineer names, submittal control number, specification section, a list ofproducts or item names with model numbers in the order they appear in the package,and spaces for approval stamps. A sample cover sheet is included at the end of thissection.

1.9.1.1.4 Submittals shall have been reviewed and approved by the General Contractor (or PrimeContractor). Evidence of this review and approval shall be an "Approved" stamp with asignature and date on the cover sheet.

1.9.1.1.5 Submittals that include a series of fixtures or devices (such as plumbing fixtures orvalves) shall be organized by the fixture number or valve type and be markedaccordingly. Each fixture must include all items associated with that fixture regardlessof whether or not those items are used on other fixtures.

1.9.1.1.6 The electrical design shown on the drawings supports the mechanical equipment basisof design specifications at the time of design. If mechanical equipment is submitted withdifferent electrical requirements, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to resolve allrequired electrical design changes (wire and conduit size, type of disconnect or overloadprotection, point(s) of connection, etc.) and clearly show the new electrical design on themechanical submittal with a written statement that this change will be provided at noadditional cost. Mechanical submittals made with no written reference to the electricaldesign will be presumed to work with the electrical design. Any corrections required willbe at no additional cost.

1.9.1.1.7 Submittals shall be in searchable PDF format and not a scanned copy.


15005-3


M&A 15024

1.9.1.1.8 Submittals shall ONLY contain relevant product data. Remove or strickout irrelevantproduct data.

1.9.2 If the shop drawings show variation from the requirements of contract because ofstandard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention ofsuch variation in writing in his letter of transmittal and on the submittal cover sheet inorder that, if acceptable, Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executingthe work in accordance with the contract.

1.9.3 Review of shop drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules shall not relievethe Contractor from responsibility for deviations from contract drawings or specifications,unless he has in writing called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer each suchdeviation in writing at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibilityfor errors of any sort in shop drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules. Any feature or function specified but not mentioned in the submittal shall be assumed tobe included per the specification.

1.9.4 Submit shop drawings as called for in other sections after award of the contract andbefore any material is ordered or fabricated. Shop drawings shall consist of plans,sections, elevations and details to scale (not smaller than ¼" per foot), with dimensionsclearly showing the installation. Direct copies of small scale project drawings issued tothe Contractor are not acceptable. Drawings shall take into account equipment furnishedunder other sections and shall show space allotted for it. Include construction details andmaterials.

1.10 Test Reports and Verification Submittals: Submit test reports, certifications andverification letters as called for in other sections. Contractor shall coordinate the requiredtesting and documentation of system performance such that sufficient time exists toprepare the reports, submit the reports, review the reports and take corrective actionwithin the scheduled contract time.

1.11 O&M Data Submittals: Submit Operation and Maintenance data as called for in othersections. When a copy of approval submittals is included in the O&M Manual, only thefinal “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” document shall be used. Contractor shallorganize these data by specification number. Prepare O&M Manuals as required byDivision 1 Section 01700 and as described herein. Submit O&M Manuals on asearchable CD-ROM in addition to required hard bound copies. Submit manuals priorto the Substantial Completion inspection.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 All materials shall be new or Owner-supplied reused as shown on the drawings, the bestof their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at thebuilding and shall be of reputable manufacturers. The description, characteristics, andrequirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditionsestablished in the following sections.

2.2 Equipment and Materials:


15005-4


M&A 15024

2.2.1 Shall be new and the most suitable grade for the purpose intended. Equipmentfurnished under this division shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engagedin the manufacture of such items for a period of three years. Where practical, all of thecomponents shall be products of a single manufacturer in order to provide propercoordination and responsibility. Where required, Contractor shall furnish proof ofinstallation of similar units or equipment.

2.2.2 Each item of equipment shall bear a name plate showing the manufacturer's name, tradename, model number, serial number, ratings and other information necessary to fullyidentify it. This plate shall be permanently mounted in a prominent location and shall notbe concealed, insulated or painted.

2.2.3 The label of the approving agency, such as UL, IBR, ASME, ARI, AMCA, by which astandard has been established for the particular item shall be in full view.

2.2.4 The equipment shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularlyengaged in the production of such equipment and shall be a product of themanufacturer's latest design.

2.2.5 A service organization with personnel and spare parts shall be available within two hoursfor each type of equipment furnished.

2.2.6 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place in service by afactory trained representative where required.

2.2.7 Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple manufacturersto indicate quality, material and type of construction desired. Manufacturer's productsshown on the drawings have been used as basis for design; it shall be the Contractor'sresponsibility to ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products, or the particularproducts of named manufacturers, meet the detailed specifications and that size andarrangement of equipment are suitable for installation.

2.2.8 Model Numbers: Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the drawings andspecifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listedfor the contractor's convenience. The contractor shall determine the actual modelnumbers for ordering materials in accordance with the written description of each itemand with the intent of the drawings and specifications.

2.3 Requests for Substitution:

2.3.1 Where a particular system, product or material is specified by name, consider it asstandard basis for bidding, and base proposal on the particular system, product ormaterial specified.

2.3.2 Requests by Contractor for substitution will be considered only when reasonable, timely,fully documented, and qualifying under one or more of the following circumstances.


15005-5


M&A 15024

2.3.2.1 Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract timerequirements.

2.3.2.2 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non-compatible, or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has otherrecognized disability as certified by Contractor.

2.3.2.3 Substantial cost advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantagesincluding delays, additional compensation for redesign, investigation, evaluation andother necessary services and similar considerations.

2.3.3 All requests for substitution shall contain a "Comparison Schedule" and clearly andspecifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specifiedas the basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shallinclude but shall not be limited to data as follows for both the specified and substitutedproducts:

Principal of operation.Materials of construction or finishes.Thickness of gauge of materials.Weight of item.Deleted features or items.Added features or items.Changes in other work caused by the substitution.Performance curves.

If the approved substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called tothe attention of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner reserves the right to require equal orsimilar features to be added to the substituted products (or to have the substitutedproducts replaced) at the Contractor's expense.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first-class workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods andpractice. Any materials installed which do not present an orderly and reasonably neatand/or workmanlike appearance, or do not allow adequate space for maintenance, shallbe removed and replaced when so directed by the Architect/Engineer.

3.2 Coordination:

3.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the mechanical systems withshop drawings of the building construction so the proper openings and sleeves orsupports are provided for piping, ductwork, or other equipment passing through slabs orwalls.

3.2.2 Any additional steel supports required for the installation of any mechanical equipment,piping, or ductwork shall be furnished and installed under the section of the specifications


15005-6


M&A 15024

requiring the additional supports.

3.2.3 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that all equipment such as valves,dampers, filters and such other apparatus or equipment that may require maintenanceand operation are made easily accessible, regardless of the diagrammatic locationshown on the drawings.

3.2.4 All connections to fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings shall be considereddiagrammatic unless otherwise indicated by detail. The actual connections shall bemade to fully suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for expansionand servicing.

3.2.5 The Contractor shall protect equipment, material, and fixtures at all times. He shallreplace all equipment, material, and fixtures which are damaged as a result ofinadequate protection.

3.2.6 Prior to starting and during progress of work, examine work and materials installed byothers as they apply to work in this division. Report conditions which will preventsatisfactory installation.

3.2.7 Start of work will be construed as acceptance of suitability of work of others.

3.3 Interruption of Service: Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie-ins,arrangements shall be made with the Architect/Engineer and this work shall be done atthe time best suited to the Owner. This will typically be on weekends and/or holidaysand/or after normal working hours. Services shall be restored the same day unless priorarrangements are made. All overtime or premium costs associated with this work shallbe included in the base bid.

3.4 Phasing: Provide all required temporary valves, piping, ductwork, equipment anddevices as required. Maintain temporary services to areas as required. Remove alltemporary material and equipment on completion of work unless Engineer concurs thatsuch material and equipment would be beneficial to the Owner on a permanent basis.

3.5 Cutting and Patching: Contractor shall provide all cutting and patching of all holes,chases, sleeves, and other openings required for installation of equipment furnished andinstalled under this section. Utilize experienced trades for cutting and patching. Obtainpermission from Architect/Engineer before cutting any structural items.

3.6 Equipment Setting: Bolt equipment directly to concrete pads or vibration isolators asrequired, using hot-dipped galvanized anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Level equipment.

3.7 Painting: Touch-up factory finishes on equipment located inside and outside shall bedone under Division 15. Obtain matched color coatings from the manufacturer and applyas directed. If corrosion is found during inspection on the surface of any equipment,clean, prime, and paint, as required.

3.8 Record (As Built) Drawings:


15005-7


M&A 15024

3.8.1 Upon completion of the work, record drawings shall be prepared as described in theGeneral Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Section 01900.

3.8.2 For projects done in Revit, the A/E will update the Revit model for all field orders, ASIsor other Owner directed revisions. The Contractor shall update the Revit model with allshop drawing data, manufacturer model numbers and field adjustments. True Revit filesare required. Imported files such as PDF, linked files, print clouds and IFC files are notacceptable.

3.9 Acceptance:

3.9.1 Punch List: Submit written confirmation that all punch lists have been checked and therequired work completed.

3.9.2 Training: Submit training syllabi prior to training for owner review.

3.9.3 Instructions: At completion of the work, provide a competent and experienced personwho is thoroughly familiar with project, for one day to instruct permanent operatingpersonnel in operation of equipment and control systems. This is in addition to anyspecific equipment operation and maintenance training.

3.9.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish searchable PDF manuals with Table ofContents, organized, and tabbed by specification section. Upload to SharePoint. Submitin accordance with Section 01700.

Detailed operating instructions and instructions for making minor adjustments.Complete wiring and control diagrams.Routine maintenance operations.Manufacturer's catalog data, service instructions, and parts lists for each piece ofoperating equipment.Copies of approved submittals.Copies of all manufacturer's warranties.Copies of test reports and verification submittals.

3.9.5 Record Drawings: Submit record drawings. Submit Revit central files. The model shall

contain true Revit files that are editable.


15005-8


M&A 15024

This is a sample cover sheet. Useone for each shop drawing.

Use whatever standardheadings you want here

List each item separately

Typical - list mfr name& model number

M&A will listall commentson this sheetand will onlystampapprovals on this sheet

Leave space after each individual item for M&A comments

General Contractor’sAPPROVAL stamp mustbe on this sheet.

PROJECT NAMEPROJECT NUMBER

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: Moses & Associates, Inc.

CONTRACTOR: XYZ Construction

SUBCONTRACTOR: ABC Mechanical Contractor

SUPPLIER: Jones Supply Co.

MANUFACTURER: Various

DATE: 2/15/95

SECTION: 15545/Hydronic Specialties

1. Vent valves - Hoffman No. 62

2. In-line air separators - Bell & Gossett RL-4

3. Diaphragm type compression tanks - Bell & Gossett B-200

4. Pump suction diffusers - Bell & Gossett ED-3

5. Triple duty valves - Bell & Gossett 3D-4S

6. Shot feeders - J. Woods No. 2

7. Pressure relief valves - Watts No. 6

8. Pressure reducing valves - Bell & Gossett No. 7

END OF SECTION

SA

MP

LE


15005-9

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15020University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida CODES AND STANDARDS

M&A 15024

SECTION 15020/CODES AND STANDARDS

1 GENERAL

1.1 The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materialsand performing all operations necessary for the installation of the mechanical work asherein called for and shown on the drawings.

1.2 This is a Basic Mechanical Requirements section. Provisions of this section apply towork of all Division 15 sections.

2 CODES

2.1 All work under Division 15 shall be constructed in accordance with the codes listedherein. The design has been based on the requirements of these codes; and while it isnot the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that all work called for complies withthese codes, he shall be responsible for calling to the Architect/Engineer's attention anydrawings or specifications that are not in conformance with these or other codes prior toordering equipment or installing work.

2.2 Comply with regulations and codes of utility suppliers.

2.3 Where no specific method or form of construction is called for in the contract documents,the Contractor shall comply with code requirements when carrying out such work.

2.4 Where code conflict exists, generally the most restrictive requirement applies. Complywith current code edition, unless noted.

2.5 Additional codes or standards applying to a specific part of the work may be included inthat section.

2.6 The following codes govern the work:

2.6.1 Florida Building Code - Building - 2010.

2.6.2 Uniform Fire Code (NFPA 1) - 2012 Florida Edition.

2.6.3 Installation of Sprinkler Systems (NFPA 13) - 2010.

2.6.4 Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems (NFPA 14) - 2010.

2.6.5 Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps (NFPA 20) - 2010.

2.6.6 Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) - 2012 Florida Edition.

3 STANDARDS

All mechanical materials, installation and systems shall meet the requirements of the


15020-1

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15020University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida CODES AND STANDARDS

M&A 15024

following standards, including the latest addenda and amendments, to the extentreferenced:

3.1 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)

3.2 American National Standards Institution (ANSI)

3.3 American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)

3.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

3.5 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

END OF SECTION


15020-2

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15030University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida MECHANICAL RELATED WORK

M&A 15024

SECTION 15030/MECHANICAL RELATED WORK

1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 This is a Basic Mechanical Requirements section. Provisions of this section apply towork of all Division 15 sections.

1.3 Coordinate all cutting and patching. Contractor shall review all cutting and patchingrequired prior to bidding and shall coordinate installation.

2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

2.1 Specific requirements for excavation and backfill for underground piping are containedin Section 15190.

2.2 The following work is part of Division 15:

2.2.1 All site fire protection piping.

3 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

3.1 Refer to Division 3, Concrete for:

3.1.1 Rough grouting in and around mechanical work.

3.1.2 Patching concrete cut to accommodate mechanical work.

3.2 The following is part of Division 15 work, complying with the requirements of Division.3

3.2.1 Curbs, foundations and pads for mechanical equipment.

3.2.2 Underground structural concrete to accommodate mechanical work.

4 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

4.1 The following is part of Division 15 work, complying with the requirements of Division 7.

4.1.1 Fire barrier penetration seals.

5 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

5.1 Refer to Division 9, Finishes for:

5.1.1 Painting exposed piping.


15030-1

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15030University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida MECHANICAL RELATED WORK

M&A 15024

5.1.2 Painting color-coded mechanical work indicated for continuous painting. See colorschedule in Division 15 section, "Mechanical Identification".

5.2 Colors shall be selected by the Architect for all painting of exposed mechanical work inoccupied spaces, unless specified herein.

5.3 Perform the following as part of Division 15 work:

5.3.1 Touch up painting of factory finishes.

5.3.2 Painting of all hangers.

6 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

6.1 Refer to Division 10 - Specialties for:

6.1.1 Fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets and accessories.

7 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

7.1 Contractor shall coordinate the exact electrical requirements of all mechanical equipmentbeing provided. Where approval submittals are required, this coordination shall beaccomplished prior to making the submittals. The electrical design shown on thedrawings supports the mechanical equipment basis of design. If mechanical equipmentis submitted with different electrical requirements, it is the responsibility of the Contractorto resolve all required electrical design changes (wire and conduit size, type ofdisconnect or overload protection, point(s) of connection, etc.) and clearly show the newelectrical design on the mechanical submittal with a written statement that this design willbe provided at no additional cost. Mechanical submittals made with no written referenceto the electrical design will be presumed to work with the electrical design. Anycorrections required will be at no additional cost.

7.2 Contractor shall provide disconnect switches, starters, and contactors for mechanicalequipment under Division 16 unless specifically noted as being furnished as part ofmechanical equipment.

7.3 Contractor shall provide all power wiring, raceway and devices, and make final electricalconnections to all mechanical equipment, switches, starters, contactors, controllers, andsimilar equipment.

END OF SECTION


15030-2

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15105University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

M&A 15024

SECTION 15105/PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

1 GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is partof each Division-15 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein.

1.3 Extent of pipes and pipe fittings required by this section is indicated on drawings and/orspecified in other Division-15 sections.

1.4 Codes and Standards:

1.4.1 Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASMEB31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wallthickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is notindicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installationrequirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. All pipingprovided for a particular system shall be by the same manufacturer.

2.2 Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class andpressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and typesmatching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwiseindicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, andwith pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable.

2.3 Piping Materials/Products:

2.3.1 Pipe Thread Tape: Teflon tape.

2.3.2 Protective Coating: Koppers Bitumastic No. 505 or equal.

2.3.3 Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast iron flanges; raised-facefor steel flanges, unless otherwise noted.

2.3.4 Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode for welding materials. Materials shall be determined by installer to comply withinstallation requirements.

2.4 Steel Pipes and Pipe Fittings

2.4.1 Pipes:


15105-1


M&A 15024

2.4.1.1 Black or Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A795, ASTM 135.

2.4.2 Pipe Fittings:

2.4.2.1 Threaded Cast Iron: ANSI B16.4.

2.4.2.2 Threaded Malleable Iron: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.

2.4.2.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39; selected by installer for proper pipingfabrication and service requirements including style, end connections, and metal-to-metalseats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated.

2.4.2.4 Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.

2.4.2.5 Flanged Cast Iron: ANSI B16.1, including bolting.

2.4.2.6 Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing.

2.4.2.7 Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short radiuselbows and returns, rated to match connected pipe.

2.4.2.8 Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not useless than schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1 ½ inches,and where pipe size is less than 1 ½ inches, and do not thread nipples full length (noclose-nipples).

2.4.2.8.1 Fittings: Precision, cold drawn, stainless steel with elastomer O-ring seals, suitable forworking pressure to 500-psig. Victaulic Vic-Press for Schedule 10S pipe.

2.4.3 Victaulic Mechanical Couplings: Provide standard mechanical couplings consisting of two

segments of cast ductile iron per ASTM A-536 with pressure-responsive synthetic rubbergaskets per ASTM-2000. Bolts shall be zinc plated per ASTM B-633 with heat treatedcarbon steel track head per ASTM A-449 and ASTM A-183 provided by Victaulic. Couplings shall comply with ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance ofGasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.

2.4.3.1 Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads to provide systemrigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.1, B31.9, withVictaulic Style 107H/107N (Quick-Vic™), installation ready rigid coupling for direct stabinstallation without field disassembly. Gasket shall be Grade “EHP” EPDM designed foroperating temperature from -30EF to +250EF.

2.4.3.2 Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required.Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment connections.Three couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in closed proximity to the vibrationsource. Victaulic Style 177 (Quick-Vic™), installation ready and Style 77 flexiblecoupling.


15105-2


M&A 15024

2.4.3.3 Victaulic AGS Mechanical Couplings: 14" (DN352) through 60" (DN1500). Couplingsshall consist of two ASTM A-536 ductile iron housing segments with lead-in chamfer onhousing key and a wide-width elastomer pressure responsive gasket. Victaulic StyleW07 AGS rigid and Style W77 AGS flexible coupling.

2.4.3.4 Fittings shall be ductile iron to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12; wrought steel to ASTMA234, Grade WPB; or factory fabricated from ASTM A53 steel pipe.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

3.1.1 General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practiceswhich will achieve permanently-leakproof piping systems, capable of performing eachindicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints andcouplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenanceor replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use ofreducing fittings, not bushings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16"misalignment tolerance.

3.1.2 Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

3.1.3 Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched todrain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel withwalls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details andnotations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does notobstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Holdpiping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural andpermanent-enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to ½" where furring is shownfor enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Wherepossible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation.

3.1.4 Concealed Piping: Unless specifically noted as “Exposed” on the drawings, concealpiping from view in finished and occupied spaces, by locating in column enclosures,chases, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encasehorizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. Protect concealed piping fromphysical damage in accordance with the Florida Building Code - Plumbing.

3.1.5 Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and otherelectrical, communications, or data equipment spaces and enclosures unless shown. Install drip pan under piping that must run through electrical spaces.

3.1.5.1 Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, not from drawings. Keep pipes free ofcontact with building construction and installed work.

3.2 Piping System Joints: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system.


15105-3


M&A 15024

3.2.1 Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1; cut threads full and clean using sharpdies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipejoint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fittingmanufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3threads exposed. Paint exposed threads to retard rusting.

3.2.2 Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connection with valves andequipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniformcompression of gaskets. Bolts shall project 1/8" to 3/8" beyond nut face when tight.

3.2.3 Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows. Beguided by ANSI B.31.

3.2.3.1 Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F.

3.2.3.2 Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5° angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean toremove slag, metal particles and dirt.

3.2.3.3 Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10". All welds shall beopen-butt.

3.2.3.4 Build up welds with root pass, followed by filler pass and then a cover pass. Eliminatevalleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensureelimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallicinclusions.

3.2.3.5 Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate tocomply with requirements.

3.2.3.6 At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is lessthan 3" and at least two pipe sizes smaller than main pipe indicated; or install regular "T"fitting. Weld-O-Let or equal.

3.2.3.7 All field welding and cutting using oxygen-acetylene methods within the building shall beperformed in accordance with NFPA-51B.

3.2.4 Grooved Joints: Provide roll or cut grooved-end pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with

the Victaulic written installation directions. If this system is chosen, all fittings are requiredto be insulated per the specification. Grooved ends shall be clean and free fromindentations, projections, and roll marks. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by thecoupling manufacturer, and shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. Afactory-trained field representative of the mechanical joint manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools andinstallation of grooved piping products. The factory-trained representative shallperiodically review the product installation and ensure best practices are being followed.Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. A distributor’srepresentative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.


15105-4


M&A 15024

3.3 Piping Installation

3.3.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction.

3.3.2 Underground Piping:

3.3.2.1 Provide plastic tape markers over all underground piping. Locate markers 18" abovepiping.

3.3.3 Install ductile and cast-iron water mains and appurtenances in accordance with AWWAC600.

END OF SECTION


15105-5

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15110University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida VALVES

M&A 15024

SECTION 15110/VALVES

1 GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of eachDivision-15 section making reference to or requiring valves specified herein.

1.3 Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in otherDivision-15 sections.

1.4 Quality Assurance:

1.4.1 Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged or welding-endvalve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10.

1.4.2 Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.

1.4.3 Valve Listing: For valves on fire protection piping, provide UL listing.

1.5 Approval Submittals: When required by other Division-15 sections, submit product data,catalog cuts, specifications, and dimensioned drawings for each type of valve. Includepressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valves with Division-15section using the valves, not as a separate submittal. Submit valve comparison chart withapplicable valves clearly marked if valves other than basis-of-design are to be used. Foreach valve, identify systems where the valve is intended for use.

1.5.1 Gate Valves. Type GA.

1.5.2 Check Valves. Type CK.

1.5.3 Ball Valves. Type BA.

1.5.4 Butterfly Valves. Type BF.

1.6 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit installationinstructions, maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve. Include thisdata in the O&M Manual.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use inservice indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide properselection as determined by Installer to comply with specifications and installationrequirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe,tube, and equipment connections.


15110-1


M&A 15024

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves of oneof the producers listed for each valve type. The model numbers are listed for contractor’sconvenience only. In the case of a model number discrepancy, the written description shallgovern.

2.3 Gate Valves:

2.3.1 Packing: Select valves designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened,equipped with non-asbestos packing suitable for intended service. Select valves designedso back seating protects packing and stem threads from fluid when valve is fully opened,and equipped with gland follower.

2.3.2 Comply with the following standards:

Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-70. Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80. Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34. Steel Standard Class Valve Ratings.

2.3.3 Types of gate (GA) valves:

1 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (GA6): 175 WWP, bronze body, screwed bonnet,rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge, UL-listed. Stockham B-133. Nibco T-104-0.

2 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (GA7): 175 WWP, iron body, bolted bonnet, risingstem, OS&Y, solid wedge, UL listed. Stockham G-634. Nibco F-607-0TS

2.4 Check Valves:

2.4.1 Construction: Construct valves of castings free of any impregnating materials. Constructvalves with a bronze regrinding disc with a seating angle of 40º to 45º, unless a compositiondisc is specified. Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, unless otherwisespecified. Disc and hanger shall be separate parts with disc free to rotate. Support hangerpins on both ends by removable side plugs.


Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-71. Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and ThreadedEnds.

Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80. Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34. Steel Standard Class Valve Ratings.

2.4.3 Types of check (CK) valves:

1 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (CK4): 200 WWP, bronze body, screwed cap,horizontal swing, regrinding type bronze disc, for fire sprinkler use. Nibco KT-403-W.


15110-2


M&A 15024

2 Flanged Ends 2½" and Larger (CK5): 175 WWP, iron body, bolted cap, bronzemounted, composition disc, UL listed, with ball drip if required. Stockham G-940.Nibco F-908-W.

2.5 Ball Valves:

2.5.1 General: Select with port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe area, include seatring designed to hold sealing material.

2.5.2 Construction: Ball valves shall be rated for 150 psi saturated steam and 600 psi non-shockcold water. Pressure containing parts shall be constructed of ASTM B-584 alloy 844, orASTM B-124 alloy 377. Valves shall be furnished with blow-out proof bottom loadedstainless steel stem. Provide TFE packing, TFE thrust washer, stainless steel ball andreinforced teflon seats. Valves 2" and smaller shall be full port design. Valves 2½" andlarger shall be conventional port design. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use ininsulated piping where insulation exceeds ½” thickness.


MSS SP-72. Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Service.MSS SP-110. Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and FlaredEnds.

2.5.4 Types of ball (BA) valves:

1 Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (BA4): 175 WWP, bronze two-piece body, UL listedfor fire protection service. Nibco KT-585-70-66-UL and KT-580-70-66-UL.

2 Threaded Ends 2½" and Smaller (BA6): 300 WWP, bronze three-piece body, gearoperator with handwheel, indicator flag, accepts tamper switch, for fire protection,UL listed. Nibco T-505-4 and G-505-4.

2.6 Butterfly Valves:

2.6.1 General: Comply with MSS SP-67, Butterfly Valves. Provide butterfly valves designed fortight shut-off. Where used for terminal or equipment removal or repair, select lug typevalves. Select wafer type valves for other applications. Provide gear operators on allbutterfly valves 6" and larger.

2.6.2 Types of butterfly (BF) valves:

1 Lug Type 4" and Larger (BF6): 175 WWP, ductile-iron body, gear-operated, nickel-plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, Type 416 stainless steel stem, EPDMseat, UL listed. Stockham LG-72U. Nibco LD 3500-5.

2 Grooved Type 4" and Larger (BF7): 175 WWP, ductile-iron body, gear-operated,nickel-plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, Type 416 stainless steel stem,EPDM seat, UL listed. Stockham LG-82U. Nibco GD 2000-5.


15110-3


M&A 15024

3 Grooved Type 2" and Larger (BF8): Ductile iron or bronze body, EPDM or nitrileseats, grooved or threaded connections with integral tamper switch. UL listedVictaulic Series 705 or Butterball BB-SCS02 or BBVSCS02.

2.7 Victaulic: Grooved Victaulic valves may be used at Contractor’s option, provided acomparison chart is submitted showing that the grooved valves are equal to basis of designvalves.

2.8 Valve Features:

2.8.1 General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provideproper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply withANSI B31.1

2.8.2 Valve features specified or required shall comply with the following:

1 Flanged: Provide valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5(steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).

2 Threaded: Provide valve ends complying with ANSI B1.20.

3 Solder-Joint: Provide valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.

4 Trim: Fabricate pressure-containing components of valve, including stems (shafts)and seats from brass or bronze materials, of standard alloy recognized in valvemanufacturing industry unless otherwise specified.

5 Non-Metallic Disc: Provide non-metallic material selected for service indicated inaccordance with manufacturer's published literature.

6 Renewable Seat: Design seat of valve with removable disc, and assemble valve sodisc can be replaced when worn.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation:

3.1.1 General: Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,including valves in branch lines to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to beaccessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. Install valveswith stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointeddownward below horizontal plane.

3.1.2 Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in propermanner to receive insulation.

3.1.3 Applications Subject to Corrosion: Do not install bronze valves and valve components indirect contact with steel, unless bronze and steel are separated by dielectric insulator.


15110-4


M&A 15024

3.2 Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select andinstall valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

3.2.1 Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves.

3.2.2 Pipe Size 2½" and Larger: Flanged valves.

3.3 Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic disc tolocations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to preventtight shutoff of metal seated valves.

3.4 Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwiseindicated.

3.5 Installation of Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontallyperpendicular to center line of pipe. Install for proper direction flow. Nonslam check valvesinstalled at pump discharge shall be installed at least four pipe diameters from the pumpdischarge or any elbows. Provide flow straighteners if conditions prohibit requiredclearances.

END OF SECTION


15110-5

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15112University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida FUSES 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

M&A 15024

SECTION 15112/FUSES 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

1 GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of thisSection.


1.3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of product indicated.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Producers: Buss, Farraz Shamut, Littlefuse, Siemens.

2.2 General: Products listed herein are common to various Mechanical SpecificationSections for this project and as shown on this project's Drawings.

2.3 All fuses furnished for a particular item of equipment shall be by the same producer.

2.4 Voltage Rating:

2.4.1 Provide 600 volt fuses for 277/480 volt systems.

2.4.2 Provide 250 volt fuses for 120, 208 and 240 volt systems.

2.5 Ampere Ratings: Ampere ratings of fuses shall be as required by the equipmentmanufacturer.

2.6 Interrupting Ratings: Interrupting ratings of fuses shall be as required by the equipmentmanufacturer.

2.7 Current Limitation: Current limiting fuses shall be provided where required by theequipment manufacturer.

2.8 Rejection Fuse Clips: Provide fuse with rejection feature for switches required to havethe rejection feature as required by the equipment manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Coordinate fuse type and ampacity with fuse holder.

3.2 Provide one set of spare fuses for each item of equipment requiring fuses. Spare fusingshall be provided within weatherproof containers for long-term storage. Spray paintcontainer with the wording “Spare Fuses” and “Name of Equipment” on the side.

END OF SECTION


15112-1

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15120University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida PIPING SPECIALTIES

M&A 15024

SECTION 15120/PIPING SPECIALTIES

1 GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is partof each Division-15 section making reference to or requiring piping specialties specifiedherein.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturerfor use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratingsindicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined byInstaller to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, andconnections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Wheremore than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2 Escutcheons:

2.2.1 General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closelyfitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Selectoutside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls,or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel orchrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.

2.2.2 Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water andcondensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brassescutcheons, solid or split hinged.

2.2.3 Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

2.3 Dielectric Waterways: Provide Victaulic Style 47 dielectric waterways for use in serviceindicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electricalconductance), prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. Dielectric unions are notacceptable.

2.4 Fire Barrier Penetration Seals:

2.4.1 Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used aspassage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork in accordance with therequirements of Division 7.

2.5 Fabricated Piping Specialties:

2.5.1 Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with


15120-1


M&A 15024

watertight joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top, either by structuralangles or by rolling top over ¼" steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low pointfor watertight joint and 1" drain line connection.

2.5.2 Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

2.5.2.1 Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplockjoint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the followinggages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.

2.5.2.2 Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.

2.5.2.3 Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.

2.5.3 Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade,or in exterior walls, of one of the following:

2.5.3.1 Caulking and Sealant: Provide foam or caulking and sealant compatible with pipingmaterials used.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors,walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior ofbuilding. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole,and is flush with adjoining surface.

3.2 Dielectric Waterways: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.3 Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Provide pipe sleeve as required. Fill entire opening withsealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions. Refer to Division7.

3.4 Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3' horizontally ofelectrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods andbuilding attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging orswaying. Connect 1" drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drainor elsewhere as indicated.

3.5 Pipe Sleeves: Where required, in accordance with the following.

3.5.1 Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed ondrawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered onpipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement insleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes largerthan piping run. Unless noted otherwise, sleeve shall be sized for full thickness ofinsulation with any vapor barrier. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeve. Install


15120-2


M&A 15024

length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface;except floor sleeves.

3.5.2 Sleeves shall be provided at the following locations:

3.5.2.1 Install iron-pipe sleeves with water stops at all at exterior penetrations in walls into thebuilding. Fill annular space with mechanical sleeve seals. Sleeves are not required forexterior penetrations through floors, but may be provided at contractor option. Ifprovided, fill mechanical space with mechanical sleeve seals.

3.5.2.2 Install iron-pipe sleeves at all penetrations of below grade foundation walls to protectpiping from movement of the building foundation.

3.5.2.3 When required by the listing criteria, install sleeves in penetrations of fire-ratedassemblies in accordance with the listing of the assembly.

3.5.2.4 For new construction projects (including additions), sleeves shall be provided for allpiping through interior cast-in-place concrete or CMU walls. Sleeves shall be placedduring the construction of the wall.

3.5.2.5 For renovation projects, sleeves shall be provided as outlined in this section for all newwalls and partitions. Sleeves in existing walls shall only be required to protect the wallfrom damage due to expansion and contraction of the piping.

3.5.2.6 Sleeves are not required for penetrations through interior gypsum wallboard partitionsunless required by one of the provisions above. Annular space around piping withoutsleeves shall be sealed with caulk or other approved material per Division 7.

3.5.2.7 For new construction projects, sleeves shall be installed for floor penetrations in areasthat are considered wet. This includes mechanical rooms, toilet rooms, and laboratories.Extend floor sleeves 2" above floor finish. Provide temporary support of sleeves duringplacement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closureto prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. Fill annular space withcaulking or fire barrier sealant as required.

3.5.2.8 For renovation projects, approved alternate water stopping methods will be consideredin lieu of sleeves for penetrations through floors.

END OF SECTION


15120-3

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15140University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida METERS AND GAUGES

M&A 15024

SECTION 15140/METERS AND GAUGES

1 GENERAL


1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is partof each Division-15 section making reference to or requiring meters and gauges specifiedherein.

1.3 Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/orspecified in other Division-15 sections.

1.4 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters and gauges.

1.5 ANSI and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and InstrumentSociety of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters andgauges.


1.6.1 Product Data: When required by other Division-15 sections, submit manufacturer'stechnical product data for each type of meter and gauge. Submit with Division-15 sectionusing meters and gauges, not as a separate submittal. Include scale range, ratings, andcalibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit for:

1.6.1.1 Pressure gauges

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit calibration curvesand operating instructions for each type of meter or gauge. Include this data in O&MManual.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers (Pressure Gauges): Subject to compliance with requirements,Ashcroft, Ernst Gauge Company, Weksler, Marshalltown Instruments, Trerice, WeissInstruments, Wheatley, Fluidyne or approved equal.

2.2 Pressure Gauges:

2.2.1 General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designedand constructed for use in service indicated.

2.2.2 Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type,bottom connection.

2.2.3 Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-½" diameter.


15140-1

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15140University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida METERS AND GAUGES

M&A 15024

2.2.4 Connector: Brass with ¼" male NPT.

2.2.5 Scale: White coated aluminum with black scale.

2.2.6 Range: Select so that highest possible pressure does not exceed 75% of full scale.

2.3 Pressure Gauge Cocks:

2.3.1 General: Provide ¼" ball valves for use as pressure gauge cocks.

2.3.2 Snubber: ¼" brass bushing with corrosion resistance porous metal disc, through whichpressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation of Pressure Gauges:

3.1.1 General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipeat most readable position.

3.1.2 Locations: Install where required by code or as shown.

3.1.3 Pressure Gauge Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber.

3.2 Adjusting And Cleaning:

3.2.1 Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.

3.2.2 Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replacecracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer'stouch-up paint.

END OF SECTION


15140-2

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15150University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

M&A 15024

SECTION 15150/SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

1 GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of eachDivision-15 section making reference to or requiring supports, anchors, and sealsspecified herein.

1.3 Extent of supports, anchors, and seals required by this section is indicated on drawingsand/or specified in other Division-15 sections.

1.4 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials andinstallation of supports, anchors, and seals.

1.5 MSS Standard Compliance:

1.5.1 Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture complywith ANSI/MSS SP-58.

1.5.2 Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.

1.5.3 Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.

1.5.4 Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.

1.6 UL Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide supportsand hangers by Grinnel, Michigan Hanger Company, B-Line Systems, or approved equal.

2.2 Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated horizontal-piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, ofone of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-pipingsystems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published productinformation. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select sizeof hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit aroundpiping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-platedhangers and supports for copper-piping systems.

2.2.1 Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1.

2.2.2 Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3.


15150-1


M&A 15024

2.2.3 Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7.

2.2.4 Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4.

2.3 Vertical-Piping Clamps: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricatedvertical-piping clamps complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSStypes listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSSSP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical pipingclamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems.

2.3.1 Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.

2.3.2 Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42.

2.4 Hanger-Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricatedhanger-rod attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSStypes listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and buildingattachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published productinformation. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select sizeof hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rodattachments for copper-piping systems.

2.4.1 Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.

2.4.2 Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.

2.5 Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated buildingattachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed,selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachmentsto suit hanger rods.

2.5.1 Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21.

2.5.2 C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.

2.5.3 Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.

2.5.4 Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34.

2.5.5 Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18.

2.6 Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields underpiping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddlesand shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.

2.6.1 Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent


15150-2


M&A 15024

crushing of insulation.

2.6.2 Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; use with rollers, fill interior voids with segments ofinsulation matching adjoining insulation.

2.7 Miscellaneous Materials:

2.7.1 Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.

2.7.2 Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36.

2.7.3 Cement Grout: Portland cement (ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and cleanuniformly graded, natural sand (ANSI/ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 partcement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required forplacement and hydration.

2.7.4 Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes or continuous channel strutsselected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1 Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required buildingstructural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correctinadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and otherbuilding structural attachments.

3.1.2 Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shallmeet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, andinstallers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section for purpose ofreviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work incompliance with requirements specified.

3.2 Installation of Building Attachments:

3.2.1 Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel forproper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicatedin MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required foradditional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansionjoints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete isplaced; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength lessthan 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

3.2.2 In areas of work requiring attachments to existing concrete, use self drilling rod inserts,Phillips Drill Co., "Red-Head" or equal.

3.3 Installation of Hangers and Supports:


15150-3


M&A 15024

3.3.1 General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properlyfrom building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runsof horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69, Florida BuildingCode-Plumbing and Mechanical, or as listed herein, whichever is most limiting. Wherepiping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangersfor smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do notuse wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from otherpiping.

3.3.1.1 Fire protection piping: support in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.3.2 Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washersand other accessories.

3.3.3 Provision for Movement:

3.3.3.1 Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and topermit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansionjoints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

3.3.3.2 Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading andstresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3.3.3.3 Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so thatmaximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded.

3.3.3.4 Sway Bracing: Provide rigid support sway bracing for all changes in direction greaterthan 45 degrees on piping 4" and larger.

3.3.4 Support fire protection piping independently of other piping.

3.4 Installation of Anchors:

3.4.1 Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permittedby ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

3.4.2 Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and tostructure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

3.4.3 Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principalpipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and elbows. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion andcontraction of piping.

3.5 Equipment Bases:


15150-4


M&A 15024

3.5.1 Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor mounted equipment furnished as partof the work of Division 15. Size bases to extend minimum of 4" beyond equipment basein any direction; and 4" above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete,roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floorand base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer topand edge corners.

3.5.2 Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung fromstructure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Providefactory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands. Prime and paint withblack enamel.

END OF SECTION


15150-5

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15160University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

M&A 15024

SECTION 15160/MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

1 GENERAL


1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is partof each Division-15 section making reference to or requiring identification devicesspecified herein.

1.3 Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on drawingsand/or specified in other Division-15 sections.

1.4 Refer to Division-16 sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not workof this section. Refer to other Division-15 sections for identification requirements forcontrols; not work of this section.

1.5 Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required foreach application as referenced in other Division-15 sections. Where more than singletype is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selectionfor each product category.

2.2 Painted Identification Materials

2.2.1 Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizesgenerally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similarapplications, but not less than 1-¼" high letters for ductwork and not less than ¾" highletters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

2.2.2 Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwiseindicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

2.2.3 Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel.

2.3 Plastic Pipe Markers

2.3.1 Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanentadhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers.

2.3.1.1 Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes pipingsystem in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance withname as shown or specified.


15160-1


M&A 15024

2.3.1.2 Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrallywith piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unitof plastic.

2.4 Valve Tags:

2.4.1 Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engravedpiping system abbreviation in ¼" high letters and sequenced valve numbers ½" high, andwith 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide 1-½" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

2.4.2 Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 3/32" thick engravedplastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in ¼" high letters andsequenced valve numbers ½" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide 1-½"square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise indicated.

2.5 Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs:

2.5.1 General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes andthicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes andwording indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mountingis necessary because of substrate.

2.5.2 Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; c" for larger units.

2.5.3 Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesivewhere screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.6 Stamped Nameplates: Provide equipment manufacturer's standard stamped nameplatesfor all equipment.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification priorto installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.2 Piping System Identification:

3.2.1 General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated toreceive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:

3.2.1.1 Plastic pipe markers.

3.2.1.2 Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast.

3.2.2 Locate pipe markers as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces,


15160-2


M&A 15024

machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces and exterior non-concealed locations.

3.2.2.1 Near each valve and control device.

3.2.2.2 Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark eachpipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

3.2.2.3 Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessibleenclosures.

3.2.2.4 Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

3.2.2.5 Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reducespacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment.

3.2.2.6 On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spacedmarkers.

3.2.3 The following piping shall be color-coded where exposed in mechanical and electricalrooms and outside by completely painting the piping (primer and two finish coats) withthe indicated color. Use standard colors where exposed in finished spaces. Usestandard identification methods in concealed areas.

Fire protection piping exposed in mechanical, electrical and telecom rooms - Red Fire protection piping exposed in stairwells or occupied space - As directed by Architect

3.3 Valve Identification: Provide coded valve tag on every valve, cock and control device ineach piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipmentunits, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-offvalves at plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections ofend-use fixtures and units. Coordinate code with operating instructions.

3.4 Valve Charts: Provide framed, glass covered valve charts in each mechanical room. Identify coded valve number, valve function, and valve location for each valve.

3.5 Mechanical Equipment Identification: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or neareach major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Label shallindicate type of system and area served. For concealed devices, sign shall be affixed inan exposed location to allow UF personnel to determine the location of the device withoutremoving the concealing material. If several small devices are located on one concealedunit, only the main unit need be identified with an exposed tag. Provide signs for thefollowing general categories of equipment and operational devices:

3.5.1 Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.

3.5.2 Pumps.

3.6 Stamped Nameplates: Equipment manufacturers to provide standard stamped


15160-3


M&A 15024

nameplates on all major equipment items such as motors, pumps, AHUs, etc. Wheremotors are hidden from view (within equipment casing, or otherwise not easilyaccessible, etc.), the equipment supplier shall furnish a duplicate motor data nameplateto be affixed to the equipment casing in an easily visible location, unless data is alreadyincluded on the equipment nameplate.

3.7 Adjusting and Cleaning:

3.7.1 Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visuallyblocked by work of this division or other divisions.

3.7.2 Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.

END OF SECTION


15160-4

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15190University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida EXCAVATION & BACKFILL

M&A 15024

SECTION 15190/EXCAVATION & BACKFILL

1 GENERAL


1.2 This section is a Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is partof each Division-15 section making reference to or requiring excavation and backfillspecified herein.

1.3 Existing Utilities: Underground utilities shown were taken from old drawings. The exactlocation of these utilities and irrigation branches and abandoned services are not known. Use extreme caution when excavating. Contact Physical Plant Division for moreinformation on utility location.

1.4 Refer to other Division-15 sections and/or drawings for specific requirements of theparticular piping system being installed. Where another Division-15 section or thedrawings conflict with requirements of this section, the other Division-15 section or thedrawings shall take precedence over the general requirements herein.

1.5 OSHA: Contractor employee worker protection for all trenching and excavationoperations shall comply with 29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P and all current OSHArequirements. Contractor shall also erect barriers, provide shoring and maintainexcavations as required to protect the public and adjacent traffic.

1.6 Trench Safety Act: Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Florida StatutesChapter 553, including the requirement to provide a separate line item to identify the costto comply on a per lineal foot of trench and per square foot of shoring. Comply with UFTrenching and Excavation Safety Policy. Refer to www.ehs.ufl.edu/general/trench02.pdf.

1.7 Dig Permit: A Dig Permit must be obtained from the University of Florida Physical Plantprior to any excavation. In case of conflicts between this specification and the Dig Permitrequirements, the most stringent will govern.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Sand: Clean, hard, uncoated grains free from organic matter or other deleterioussubstances. Sand for backfill shall be of a grade equal to mortar sand.

2.2 Gravel: Clean, well graded hard stone or gravel, free from organic material. Size rangeto be from No. 4 screen retentions to 1".

2.3 Earth: Fill free of clay, muck, stones, wood, roots or rubbish.

2.4 Identification Tape: Polyethylene 6 inches wide, 3.5 mil solid core encased in a 1 milthick protective plastic jacket continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large black lettersand type of pipe below. Tape shall conform to APWA specifications.


15190-1


M&A 15024

2.5 Copper Identification Wire: 14-gauge, single conductor, type UF.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Ditching and Excavation: Shall be performed by hand wherever there is a possibility ofencountering obstacles or any existing utility lines of any nature whatsoever. Whereclear and unobstructed areas are to be excavated, appropriate machine excavationmethods may be employed. Avoid use of machine excavators within the limits of thebuilding lines.

3.2 Bedding: Excavate to bottom grade of pipe to be installed, and shape bed of undisturbedearth to contour of pipe for a width of at least 50% of pipe diameter. If earth conditionsnecessitate excavation below grade of the pipe, such as due to the presence of clay,muck, or roots, subcut and bring bed up to proper elevation with clean, new sand (asdescribed in paragraph 2.1), deposited in 6" layers and tamped. NotifyArchitect/Engineer if subcut exceeds 12", or if bed is of an unstable nature. In this casea 6" minimum layer of gravel will be required before sand bedding begins. Submit costproposal if the earth conditions require subcut in excess of 12" or if gravel is required toachieve proper bedding.

3.3 Placing: Pipe shall be carefully handled into place. Avoid knocking loose soil from thebanks of the trench into the pipe bed. Rig heavier sections with nylon slings in lieu ofwire rope to avoid crushing or chipping. Pipe which is handled with insulation in place,coated pipe, and jacketed pipe shall have special handling slings as required to preventdamage to the material.

3.4 Backfilling: Deposit clean new sand (as described in paragraph 2.1) to 6" above the pipeand tamp. Then deposit sand or earth carefully in 6" layers, maintaining adequate sidesupport, especially on nonferrous piping materials. Compact fill in 6" layers, usingmechanical means, up to the top elevation of the pipe, and in 12" layers to rough or finishgrade as required. Fine grade and restore surface to original condition.

3.5 Special: Excavations shall be installed and maintained in satisfactory condition duringthe progress of the work. Subsurface structures are to be constructed in adequatelysized excavations. De-watering equipment shall be installed and properly maintainedwhere required. Shoring shall be employed in the event of unstable soil condition, andin all cases where required by OSHA regulations and necessary to protect materials andpersonnel from injury.

3.6 Identification: Install identification tape directly above all underground piping, one tapefor each pipe where multiple pipes are installed. Depth of tape shall be at least 6 inchesbelow finished grade and18" to 30" above buried pipe. Tape copper wire to non-metallicpipes.

3.7 Depth of Cover: Minimum cover for underground piping is 30 inches unless indicatedotherwise.


15190-2


M&A 15024

3.8 Existing Pavement: Where new piping passes below existing streets, driveways, parkinglots, or other paved areas, the pavement shall be saw cut. Backfill shall be compactedto 95% density and the pavement shall be patched to match existing pavement. Providecompaction tests and reports as required.

3.9 Landscape Restoration:

3.9.1 Lawn or Unpaved Areas: The soil shall be replaced according to the original profile. Compact the top 6" of subgrade and each 6" layer of backfill or fill material at 85%maximum density for cohesive soils and 90% relative density for cohesionless soils.

If additional soil is required, the Contractor shall supply weed free topsoil of a type tomatch existing topsoil.

3.9.2 Grass: Fine grade and solid sod with the type of grass to match the existing species andcultivar.

3.9.3 Landscape Maintenance: Contractor shall be responsible for watering and other groundsmaintenance in the area of construction until the project is accepted.

3.9.4 UF: If there are any questions regarding type of grass or landscape restoration ingeneral, Contractor should contact one of the campus landscape architects by calling392-1155 or 392-1118.

END OF SECTION


15190-3

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15305University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida SITE FIRE WATER SYSTEMS

M&A 15024

SECTION 15305/SITE FIRE WATER SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL


1.2 Division-15 Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials andMethods sections apply to work of this section.

1.3 Extent of fire water systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and byrequirements of this section. All piping and devices from (and including) the postindicator valve to the floor flange shall be provided by a licensed sprinkler contractor.

1.4 Refer to Division-3 sections for concrete work (thrust blocks) required for fire watersystems which is work of this section.

1.5 Refer to other Division-15 sections for interior building systems including sprinklers andstandpipes; not work of this section.

1.6 Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire watersystem's products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been insatisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

1.7 Contractor’s Qualifications: Installation of site fire protection piping from the point ofconnection to the domestic water system shall be performed by a contractor certified bythe State of Florida.


1.8.1 NFPA Compliance: Install fire water systems in accordance with NFPA 24 “Standardfor the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances”.

1.8.2 Local Fire Department/Marshal Regulations: Comply with governing regulationspertaining to hydrants, including hose unit threading and similar matching of connections.


1.9.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructionsfor:

1.9.1.1 Gate valves.

1.9.1.2 Indicator posts.

1.9.1.3 Backflow preventers.

1.9.2 Design Drawings: Submit design drawings for fire water systems, showing piping


15305-1


M&A 15024

materials, size, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures,connections, thrust blocks, and anchors. Show interface and spatial relationshipbetween piping and proximate structures. Submittal shall show all requirements perNFPA-13.

1.10 Test Reports and Verification Submittals:

1.10.1 Certificate: Submit Certificate of Underground Installation per NFPA 13.

1.10.2 Submit backflow preventer test report.

1.11 O&M Data Submittals:

1.11.1 Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire watersystem piping and products.

1.11.2 Maintenance Data: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit maintenance data andparts lists for gate valves, indicator posts, backflow preventers. Include these data inO&M Manual.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide blue tape with black printing reading "CAUTION WATERLINE BURIED BELOW".

2.2 Pipes and Pipe Fittings:

2.2.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installationrequirements. Provide materials and products complying with NFPA 24 whereapplicable. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; providefittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire water piping systems. Wheremore than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2.2 Piping: Provide pipes of one of the following materials, of weight/class indicated. Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same materials and weight/class as pipes, withjoining method as indicated.

2.2.2.1 Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cement mortar lining complying with AWWA C104;Class 51 unless otherwise indicated.

Fittings: Ductile-iron complying with AWWA C110, cement lined, with rubber gasketsconforming to AWWA C111.

2.3 Valves:


15305-2


M&A 15024

2.3.1 Gate Valves: Provide gate valves, UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure for 12" andsmaller. Provide threaded, flanged, hub, or other end configuration to suit size of valveand piping connection. Provide inside screw type for use with indicator post, iron bodybronze mounted, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gatevalves of one of the following:

American-Darling ValveClow Corp.; Valve Div. Kennedy ValveMuellerNibcoStockham Valves & Fittings Inc. United States Pipe and Foundry Co. Waterous Co.

2.3.2 Indicator Posts: Provide indicator posts, UL-listed, designed for use with undergroundgate valves to provide aboveground means for operating valves and indicating positionof valves. Provide telescopic barrel type with indicating target, intended for use with gatevalves 4" through 14", with operating wrench.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide indicatorposts of one of the following:

American-Darling ValveClow Corp.; Valve Div. Kennedy ValveMuellerNibcoStockham Valves & Fittings Inc. United States Pipe and Foundry Co. Waterous Co.

2.3.3 Backflow Preventers: Provide backflow preventer with inlet and outlet OS&Y gate valvesof the following type.

Reduced pressure type

Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to acceptance by the local utility, provide backflowpreventers of one of the following:

Watts FebcoWilkins

2.4 Accessories:


15305-3


M&A 15024

2.4.1 Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, caps, bends, valves,and hydrants. After installation, apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of ferrous anchorages.

2.4.2 Clamps, Straps, and Washers: Steel, ASTM A 506.

2.4.3 Rods: Steel, ASTM A 575.

2.4.4 Rod Couplings: Malleable-iron, ASTM A 197.

2.4.5 Bolts: Steel, ASTM A 307.

2.4.6 Cast-Iron Washers: Gray-iron, ASTM A 126.

2.4.7 Thrust Blocks: Concrete, 2,500 psi.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 General: During back-filling/top-soiling of underground fire water piping systems, installcontinuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6"to 8" below finished grade.

3.2 Installation of Pipe and Pipe Fittings:

3.2.1 Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 "Standard for Installation ofDuctile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances."

3.2.2 Depth of Cover: Provide 2'-6" minimum depth of cover over underground piping exceptprovide 3'-0" depth where pipe is under paved areas.

3.2.3 Anchoring: Install thrust blocks as detailed on the drawings. Provide clamps and tie rodsin accordance with NFPA 24 to properly restrain the system.

3.3 Installation of Valves:

3.3.1 General: Install valves as indicated. Provide post indicator for control valves.

3.3.2 Control Valves: Install post indicator valve at each connection into building, locate 40'from building outside wall, or as indicated.

3.3.3 Installation of Backflow Preventers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's printedinstructions with adequate space for servicing. Install 12" - 36" AFF with 12" clear inback and 24" clear in front. Provide proper restraints. Provide test and report by Stateof Florida Certified Backflow Preventer Specialist.

3.4 Notify Engineer, EH&S, and PPD Utilities 48 hours prior to backfilling undergroundpiping. EH&S will notify the State Fire Marshal of the date and time of the inspection. Contact EH&S at 352-392-1591


15305-4


M&A 15024

3.5 Field Quality Control:

3.5.1 Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered, and after thrust blockshave sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline with water 24 hours prior to testing, and applytest pressure to stabilize system.

3.5.2 Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 200 psi for 2-hrs, or at 50 psi above maximumstatic pressure if it is greater than 150 psi. Test fails if leakage exceeds 2-qts per hourper 100 gaskets or joints irrespective of pipe diameter.

Increase pressure in 50 psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. Holdat test pressure for one hour, decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test pressureand hold for one more hour.

3.5.3 EH&S shall witness all hydrostatic testing of underground piping. Contact EH&S @ 352-392-1591 at least 24 hours in advance of desired date to arrange for witnessing of thetest.

3.5.4 Flushing: Flush underground mains and lead-in connections to sprinkler risers beforeconnection is made to sprinklers, standpipes, or other fire protection system piping.

Flush at flow rate not less than that indicated in NFPA 24, or at hydraulically calculatedwater demand rate of the system, whichever is greater.

3.5.5 O&M Training: Provide four hours in one session.

END OF SECTION


15305-5

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15310University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida BUILDING SPRINKLER

AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMSM&A 15024

SECTION 15310/BUILDING SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and General provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


1.3 Extent of fire protection work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and byrequirements of this section.

1.4 Refer to other Division-15 sections for site fire protection piping and appurtenances; notwork of this section.

1.5 Refer to other Division-15 sections for fire pumps and appurtenances; not work of thissection.

1.6 Refer to Division-9 sections for painting of fire protection piping; not work of this section.

1.7 Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section.

1.7.1 Fire alarm connections for all flow switches, pressure switches, and supervisory (tamper)switches.


1.8.1 NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13"Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems" and NFPA 14 "Standard for theInstallation of Standpipe and Hose Systems".

1.8.2 UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards;provide UL label on each product.

1.8.3 Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance withlocal regulations of fire department or fire marshal.

1.8.4 Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Fire Marshal regulationsfor sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment tosprinkler systems.


1.9.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructionsfor:

1.9.1.1 Pipe and fittings


15310-1



1.9.1.2 Basic pipe supports and hangers

1.9.1.3 Basic valves

1.9.1.4 Special valves

1.9.1.5 Pressure gauges

1.9.1.6 Automatic sprinklers

1.9.1.7 Siamese connections

1.9.2 Design Drawings: Prepare design drawings of fire protection systems indicating pipesizes, pipe locations, pipe elevations, fittings, shutoffs, hangers, equipment, andcoordination with other building systems. Submittal shall show all requirements perNFPA-13.


1.10.1 Certificate: Submit certificate of Aboveground Installation upon completion of fireprotection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance withNFPA13 and NFPA 14, and that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.

1.10.2 Tag: Submit a copy of the sprinkler system tag. The installing fire sprinkler contractorshall be licensed in accordance with State Fire Marshal (SFM) Rule 69A-46. At theconclusion of the project and prior to the final inspection by the SFM the Contractor shalltag the fire sprinkler system in accordance with 69A-46.041.


1.11.1 Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire protectionpiping and products.

1.11.2 Maintenance Data: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Submit maintenance dataand parts lists for basic valves and special valves. Include these data in O&M manual.

1.11.3 NFPA 25: Provide a copy of NFPA 25, 2002 edition in each O&M Manual.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installationrequirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections;provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems. Where more than one type of material or products are indicated, selection is Installer's


15310-2



option.

2.2 Basic Identification: Provide identification complying with Division-15 Basic MechanicalMaterials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with thefollowing listing:

Fire Protection Piping: Plastic pipe markers. Fire piping exposed in mechanical andelectrical rooms shall be painted red.

Fire Protection Valves: Plastic or brass valve tags

Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs:

At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls andhydraulic design data.

At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated.

At each auxiliary drain, a sign indicating location.

2.3 Basic Pipes and Pipe Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division-15Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings", inaccordance with the following listing. Where multiple listings are made for a particulartype system, the material is the Installer’s option.

2.3.1 Wet Pipe: Seamless or welded black steel pipe; Schedule 40. Fittings and joints shallbe as follows.

1 Class 125, cast-iron threaded fittings with threaded joints.

2 Mechanical grooved pipe coupling and fittings; cut-groove type with mechanicaljoints.

3 Wrought steel buttwelding fittings with welded joints.

2.3.2 Wet Pipe: Seamless or welded black steel pipe; Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134"wall thickness for 6"; and 0.188" wall thickness for 8" and 10".

1 Class 125, cast-iron threaded fittings with threaded joints, sizes 2½" and larger.

2 Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove mechanical locking typewith mechanical joints.

3 Wrought steel buttwelding fittings with welded joints.

3.1.1 Fire Pump Suction: Seamless or welded galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40.

1 Class 150 malleable iron galvanized threaded fittings.


15310-3



2 Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical lockingtype with mechanical joints.

2.4 Basic Piping Specialties: Provide piping specialties complying with Division-15 BasicMechanical Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties".

2.5 Basic Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division-15Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Supports and Anchors", in accordancewith the following listing:

Adjustable steel clevis hangers or adjustable steel band hangers for horizontal-pipinghangers and supports.

Two-bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports.

Steel turnbuckles and malleable iron sockets for hanger-rod attachments.

Concrete inserts, top-beam C-clamps, side beam or channel clamps or center beamclamps for building attachments.

2.6 Basic Valves: Provide interior valves complying with Division-15 Basic MechanicalMaterials and Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing:

2.6.1 Standard Service Code-Required OS&Y Valves: GA-6, GA-7.

2.6.2 Standard Service Sectional Valves: GA-6, GA-7. BF-6, BF-7, BF-8.

2.6.3 Standard Service Indicating Valves: GA-6, GA-7, BA-6.

2.6.4 Standard Service Trim Valves: GA-6, BA-4.

2.6.5 Standard Service Check Valves: CK-4, CK-5.

2.7 Special Valves:

2.7.1 General: Provide valves, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Providesizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.

2.7.2 Hose Outlet Valves: Provide angle hose valves, 2-1/2" size where not otherwiseindicated. Provide chrome plated with escutcheons where mounted in cabinet. Providechain and cap.

2.7.3 Ball Drip Check Valve: Provide fire department connection iron swing check valve, 175psi rated working pressure, of size and end type indicated, with ball drip.

2.7.4 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves ofone of the following:


15310-4



Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc. Grunau Sprinkler Mfr. Co., Inc.ReliableViking Corporation

2.8 Basic Meters and Gauges: Provide meters and gauges complying with Division-15 BasicMechanical Materials and Methods section "Meters and Gauges", in accordance with thefollowing listing:

2.8.1 Pressure gauges, 0-250 psi range, UL Listed.

2.9 Fire Protection Specialties: Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordancewith the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping andequipment connections.

2.9.1 Water Flow Indicators: Provide vane type water flow switches. Provide adjustable retardif allowed by code. Do not use adjustable retard for flow switches serving elevatorequipment rooms or hoistways.

Electric Bell: Provide 10" weatherproof bell with red enameled finish, 90 db.

2.9.2 Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for use inservice indicated.

2.9.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fireprotection specialties of one of the following:

Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc.Grunau Sprinkler Mfr. Co., Inc.Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.Potter Roemer, Inc.ReliableViking corporation

2.10 Automatic Sprinklers: Provide automatic sprinklers and escutcheons of type indicatedon drawings. Provide fusible links for 165°F unless otherwise indicated.

2.10.1 Finish: White for recessed heads in occupied areas. Chrome-plated for pendant headsin occupied areas. Cast brass for unoccupied areas.

2.10.2 Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box withcapacity to store 10 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers.

2.10.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide automaticsprinklers of one of the following:

Central Sprinkler Corp.


15310-5



Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc. Star Sprinkler Mfg. Co. Inc. ReliableViking Corp.

2.11 Siamese Connections:

2.11.1 Sidewalk Siamese Connections: Provide Y-type cast brass sidewalk siameseconnection, escutcheon plate and sleeve assembly; with 2, 90°, 2-1/2" fire departmentinlets with female hose connections, fire hose connection screw thread (size and threadsapproved in writing by fire department), equipped with self-closing brass double clappervalves, equipped with caps and chains, construction features as indicated, andconstructed with the following additional construction features:

Finish: Chrome plate.

Inlet Standpipe: As shown on the drawings

Cast Lettering: "AUTO SPKR.AND STANDPIPE."

Basis of Design: Potter Roemer Figure 5760.

2.11.2 Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide wall type cast brass siamese connections andescutcheon plate assembly, with 2, 2-1/2" fire department inlets with female hoseconnections, fire hose connection screw thread (size and threads approved in writing byfire department), equipped with individual drop clapper valves, equipped with caps andchains, construction features as indicated, and constructed with the following additionalconstruction features:

Finish: Chrome plate.

Inlet Pipe: As shown on the drawings.

Cast Lettering: "AUTO. SPKR. AND STANDPIPE."

Escutcheon: Rectangular.

Siamese Connection: Flush, adjacent inlets.

Basis of Design: Potter Roemer Figure 5020.

2.11.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide siameseconnections of one of the following:

Allen (W.D.) Mfg. Div.Croker-StandardElkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.Potter-Roemer Co.


15310-6



3 EXECUTION

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials andproducts are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditionshave been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. Any installation, modification, oralteration of the sprinkler system shall be performed only by a person under a certificateof competency issued by the State Fire Marshal.

3.2 Installation of Basic Identification: Install mechanical identification in accordance withDivision-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification." Install fire protection signs on piping in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 requirements. Continuously paint exposed fire piping red in mechanical and electricalrooms.

3.3 Installation of Pipes and Pipe Fittings:

3.3.1 General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with Division-15 Basic MechanicalMaterials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings."

3.3.2 Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14for installation of fire protectionpiping materials. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practicesto ensure that piping systems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

3.3.3 Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface components of fire protection pipingproperly with other work.

3.3.4 Install drain piping at low points of piping system. Provide dry drum drips whereindicated.

3.3.5 Install hose outlet valves in piping where hose outlets are indicated.

3.3.6 Install sectional valves in inlet piping, at bottom of each riser, and in loops as indicated.

3.3.7 Install fire department connection valves in piping where fire department connections areindicated.

3.3.8 Install water flow indicators where indicated.

3.3.9 Mount supervisory switches on each sectional valve.

3.3.10 Install pressure gauges where required and at top of each standpipe.

3.3.11 Install manual shutoff at each audible alarm station.

3.3.12 Install valved hose connections of sizes indicated, or ¾" size if not otherwise indicated,on sprinkler at ends of branch lines and cross mains and at locations where indicated. The intent is to meet the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and to achieve a fully


15310-7



drainable system.

3.3.13 Install Inspector's test connection where indicated, or at most remote point from riser.

3.4 Installation of Piping Specialties: Install piping specialties in accordance with Division-15Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties."

3.5 Installation of Supports and Anchors: Install supports and anchors, in accordance withDivision-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, "Supports and Anchors."

3.6 Installation of Valves: Install valves in accordance with Division-15 Basic Materials andMethods section "Valves." Provide valves to isolate each riser and elsewhere asrequired by NFPA 13 and 14 .

3.7 Installation of Meters and Gauges: Install meters and gauges in accordance withDivision-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Meters and Gauges."

3.8 Installation of Fire Protection Specialties: Install fire protection specialties as indicated,and in accordance with NFPA 13 and 14 . Furnish wiring requirements to electricalInstaller for electrical wiring of supervisory switches.


3.9.1 Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush feedmains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinklerpiping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entiresprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in NFPA standards. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure thatdebris has not clogged sprinklers.

3.9.2 Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, forperiod of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum staticpressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system forleakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zonebeing tested.

3.9.3 Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance withNFPA standards for "little or no leakage" and retest as specified to demonstratecompliance.

3.9.4 EH&S shall witness all hydrostatic testing of the above ground sprinkler piping. ContactEH&S @ 352-392-1591 at least 24 hours in advance of desired test date to arrange forwitnessing of the test.

3.10 Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect fire protection systems in accordance withrequirements of Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Testing,Cleaning, and Sterilization of Piping Systems".


15310-8



3.11 Extra Stock:

3.11.1 Heads: For each style and temperature range required, furnish at least two additionalsprinkler heads, in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 25, and not less than 6sprinklers.

3.11.2 Wrenches: Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection andfire hose coupling. Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received.

3.12 Owner Instruction: Provide technical services for one 4-hour period to instruct Owner’s

personnel in operation and maintenance of building sprinkler systems. Schedule trainingdate with Owner. Provide at least 7-day notice to Engineer and Owner of training date.

END OF SECTION


15310-9



SECTION 15340/BUILDING SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM- DESIGN BYCONTRACTOR

1 GENERAL



1.3 Provide for the design and installation of a wet pipe sprinkler system and all undergroundpiping out to and including the post indicator valve and backflow preventer Provide firepump and all related equipment . The Contractor is the Engineer-of-Record.


1.4.1 NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13"Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems".

1.4.2 UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards;provide UL label on each product.

1.4.3 Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance withlocal regulations of fire department or fire marshal.

1.4.4 Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Fire Marshal regulationsfor sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment tosprinkler systems.


1.5.1 Certificate: Submit certificates of Aboveground and Underground Installation uponcompletion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested inaccordance with NFPA 13 and that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.

1.5.2 Tag: Submit a copy of the sprinkler system tag. The installing fire sprinkler contractorshall be licensed in accordance with State Fire Marshal (SFM) Rule 69A-46. At theconclusion of the project and prior to the final inspection by the SFM the Contractor shalltag the fire sprinkler system in accordance with 69A-46.041.


1.6.1 Refer to section 15305, 15310 and 15350 for requirements.

1.6.2 NFPA 25: Provide a copy of NFPA 25 in each O&M Manual.


15340-1



2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide materials and factory-fabricated products of sizes, types, pressureratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as required. Provide proper selection asdetermined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and typesmatching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which matchpipe materials used in fire protection systems.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials andproducts are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditionshave been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. Install the system per NFPA-13and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Any installation, modification,or alteration of the sprinkler system shall be performed only by a person under acertificate of competency issued by the State Fire Marshal.

3.2 Fire Flow Test Data: The following data were obtained on XX/XX/XX by UF PPD.

Hydrant

Hydrant

3.3 All sprinkler heads in acoustical tile ceilings shall be installed in the center of the tile bothways.

3.4 All sprinklers in finished spaces shall utilize recessed heads. Coordinate color withArchitect.

3.5 Extra Stock:

3.5.1 Heads: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinklerheads, amounting to one unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units ofeach.

3.5.2 Wrenches: Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection andfire hose coupling. Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received.

3.6 Owner Instruction: Provide technical services for one 4-hour period to instruct Owner’s

personnel in operation and maintenance of building sprinkler systems. Schedule trainingdate with Owner. Provide at least 7-day notice to Engineer and Owner of training date.

END OF SECTION


15340-2

UF-212 Newell Hall Renovation SECTION 15350University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida ELECTRIC DRIVE FIRE PUMP

M&A 15024

SECTION 15350/ELECTRIC DRIVE FIRE PUMP

1 GENERAL



1.3 Extent of fire pump work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirementsof this section.

1.4 Refer to other Division-15 sections for fire protection piping and appurtenances notspecified herein; not work of this section.

1.5 Refer to Division-3, "Concrete" for pump bases; included as work of this section.

1.6 Refer to Division-9 "Painting" for painting of all piping and devices; not work of thissection. All exposed piping in fire pump rooms shall be painted red.

1.7 Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section.

1.7.1 Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Includedisconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, orfactory-installed, by manufacturer.

1.7.2 Interlock wiring between pumps; and between pumps and field-installed control devices.

1.7.3 Fire alarm connections from fire pump controllers.


1.8.1 NFPA Compliance: Install fire pumps in accordance with NFPA 20 "Standard for theInstallation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps."

1.8.2 UL Compliance: Provide listed fire pumps and products in accordance with ULstandards; provide UL label on each product.

1.8.3 Fire Department/Fire Marshal Compliance: Install fire pumps in accordance with localregulations of fire department or fire marshal.

1.8.4 Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Fire Marshal regulationsfor sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to fireprotection systems.

1.8.5 National Electric Code: Provide fire pumps, controllers, and products complying with the

National Electric Code, NFPA-70.


15350-1


M&A 15024


1.9.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, specifications, installationand start-up instructions, and pump characteristic performance curves with selectionpoints clearly indicated. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type drawings for each productindicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assemblyof components. Verify fire pump rotation is compatible with installation arrangementshown on the drawings.

1.9.1.1 Fire pump

1.9.1.2 Fire pump controller

1.9.1.3 Jockey pump

1.9.1.4 Jockey pump controller

1.9.1.5 Accessories

1.9.2 Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR):

1.9.2.1 All controls panels and enclosures shall have SCCR labeling per NEC.

1.9.2.2 Provide equipment with SCCR suitable for location installed.

1.9.2.3 Contact engineer for maximum available fault current at equipment prior to providingapproval submittals so SCCR can be included in approval submittals.

1.9.2.4 In no case shall the SCCR be less than the following: 65 kA.


1.10.1 Certified Test Report: Submit certified factory test results from hydrostatic test andperformance tests (capacity, head, efficiency, and brake horsepower). All tests shall beperformed in accordance with NFPA-20.

1.10.2 Pump Acceptance Test Report: Submit fire pump acceptance test report per NFPA-20.

1.10.3 Controller Acceptance Test Report: Submit fire pump controller acceptance test reportper NFPA-20.


1.11.1 Maintenance Data: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Submit maintenance dataand parts lists for each type of pump and controller, including "trouble-shooting"maintenance guide. Include these data in O&M Manual.


15350-2


M&A 15024

1.11.2 Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiringto pumps and controllers. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams forinterlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that arefactory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Include in O&M Manual.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide factory-tested pumps, controllers, and related equipment, thoroughlycleaned, and painted prior to shipment. Type, size and capacity of each pump is listedin the schedule on the drawings.

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pumps andcontrollers of one of the following:

ITT-AC PumpAurora Fairbanks Morse

2.3 Unit Purchase: Pump, driver, jockey pump, controller, and related equipment shall bepurchased under a unit contract stipulating compliance with NFPA-20. The pumpmanufacturer shall be responsible for proper operation of the complete assembly asindicated by field acceptance tests.

2.4 Fire Pump: Provide UL-listed, electric drive, horizontal split case fire pumps with thefollowing performance and features:

2.4.1 Performance: The pump shall deliver at least 150% of rated capacity at 65% of ratedhead. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 120% of rated pressure.

2.4.2 Type: Provide base-mounted, double-suction, bronze-fitted, single stage, centrifugalpump. Provide nameplate.

2.4.3 Drive: Provide open drip-proof ball bearing type, continuous duty, AC, induction, squirrel-cage motor. Locked rotor current shall not exceed NFPA-20 limits. Provide flexiblecoupling, coupling guard, splash guard, and nameplate.

2.4.4 Mounting: Provide common base plate with machined registered fits for alignment.

2.4.5 Casing: Provide split casings with removable upper half to allow rotating element to beremoved without disconnecting flanges.

2.4.6 Impellers: Provide cast bronze, enclosed type impellers, dynamically balanced andkeyed to shaft.

2.4.7 Shaft: Provide steel shaft with replaceable shaft sleeve.

2.4.8 Casing Rings: Provide renewable casing wear rings designed so that pressure will seatthem to the casing.


15350-3


M&A 15024

2.5 Fire Pump Accessories: Provide the following accessories:

2.5.1 Suction and discharge pressure gauges, 3-1/2" diameter, compound for suction duty.

2.5.2 Automatic circulation relief valve set less than shut off pressure and provisions fordischarge to drain, ¾" size to 2500 gpm.

2.5.3 Eccentric tapered suction reducer.

2.5.4 Concentric tapered discharge increaser.

2.5.5 Float-operated auto air release for split case pumps.

2.5.6 Hose valves, caps, and chains, 2-1/2".

2.5.7 Hose valve test manifold with piping connections.

2.5.8 Flow measuring device.

2.5.9 Discharge tees.

2.6 Fire Pump Controller: Provide service-rated, factory-wired and tested, UL-listed firepump controller, rated for continuous duty, and with short circuit withstand capability perNFPA-20, with the following features:

2.6.1 Provide switch, circuit breaker disconnect, locked rotor overcurrent protection, magneticstarter, and pilot light.

2.6.2 Provide for automatic and manual operation.

2.6.3 Provide alarms as required.

2.6.4 Mount wiring diagrams and operating instructions on controller. Provide nameplate. Mark controller "FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER". Provide startup service.

2.6.5 Provide for sending signals to the fire alarm control panel (by Division 16) to indicatepump running, loss of power, and phase reversal.

2.6.6 Fire pump controller shall be electronic, reduced voltage, soft start.

2.7 Jockey Pump and Accessories: Provide the following:

2.7.1 Centrifugal jockey pump and motor.

2.7.2 Relief valve.

2.7.3 Factory-wired and tested, service-rated, UL-listed controller with HOA switch, fused


15350-4


M&A 15024

disconnect switch, thermal overloads, external reset, magnetic starter, pressurecontroller, and running time indicator.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which fire pump materials and productsare to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 Installation of Basic Identification: Install mechanical identification in accordance withDivision-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification".

3.3 Installation of Pipes and Pipe Fittings:

3.3.1 General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with Division-15 Basic MechanicalMaterials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings".

3.3.2 Comply with requirements of NFPA-13 for installation of fire protection piping materials. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that pipingsystems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

3.3.3 Install OS&Y valve in the fire pump suction as far from the pump as possible. Do notinstall ells within 5 pipe diameters of the pump suction and not in the plane parallel to thepump shaft. Sleeve all pipes through the wall or floor with proper clearance.

3.3.4 Install OS&Y valve and listed check valve in fire pump discharge. Provide anti-waterhammer check valve where indicated.

3.3.5 Above grade suction piping shall be galvanized steel.

3.3.6 Install hose valve test manifold with OS&Y valve, listed check valve and ball drip.

3.4 Installation of Piping Specialties: Install piping specialties in accordance with Division-15Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties".

3.5 Installation of Supports and Anchors: Install supports and anchors, in accordance withDivision-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, "Support and Anchors".

3.6 Installation of Valves: Install valves in accordance with Division-15 Basic Materials andMethods section "Valves".

3.7 Installation of Meters and Gauges: Install meters and gauges in accordance withDivision-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Meters and Gauges".

3.8 Install fire pump in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Providereinforced concrete pad, set and level pump, and align pump. Tighten bolts after pipinghas been connected and grout has set. Installation and alignment shall be performedunder the supervision of a factory-trained representative.


15350-5


M&A 15024

3.9 Install jockey pump in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Provideconcrete pad, gate valves, and discharge check valve.

3.10 Install controllers in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate firepump and jockey pump controllers as close as practical, and within sight of therespective pumps. Maintain code clearances. Protect controllers from water spray.

3.11 Furnish electrical wiring diagrams and requirements to electrical installer. All electricalwork shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA-20.

3.12 Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect fire protection system in accordance withrequirements of Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Testing,Cleaning and Sterilization of Piping Systems".


3.13.1 Test suction piping per NFPA-24 and discharge piping per NFPA-13.

3.13.2 Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, forperiod of 24 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum staticpressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system forleakage of joints.

3.13.3 Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance withNFPA standards for "little or no leakage" and retest as specified to demonstratecompliance.

3.14 Pump Acceptance Tests: Perform pump flow tests in presence of manufacturer'srepresentative, contractor, Engineer, fire department representative, and Owner. Provideall test equipment and perform tests per NFPA-20. Provide pump acceptance testreport.

3.15 EH&S and State Fire Marshal shall witness the pump acceptance test. Contact EH&S@ 352-392-1591 at least 1 week in advance of desired test date to arrange forwitnessing of the test. EH&S shall coordinate the test with the State Fire Marshal.

3.16 Controller Acceptance Tests: Perform controller tests in presence of manufacturer'srepresentative, contractor, Engineer, fire department representative, and Owner. Provideall test equipment and perform tests per NFPA-20. Perform at least 10 automatic and10 manual operations, each of at least 5 minutes duration. Tests shall result in at leastone hour of pump run time. Provide controller acceptance test report.

3.17 Jockey Pump: Set to maintain 10 psi above fire pump setting.

3.18 O&M Training: Provide four hours in one session.

3.19 Spare Parts: Provide spare fuses per Section 15112.

END OF SECTION


15350-6

Newell Hall Renovation Project UF-212 - University of...

Documents

Transcript of Newell Hall Renovation Project UF-212 - University of...